GE T60 Instruction Manual Download Page 313 | Manualshive

Page: 313 / 796

background image

GE Multilin

T60 Transformer Protection System

5-167

5 SETTINGS

5.5 FLEXLOGIC

5

Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs and outputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the
default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names
are shown in the FlexLogic operands table above.

The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the Flex-
Logic operators table.

SELF-

DIAGNOSTICS

(See

Relay Self-

tests

descriptions in

Chapter 7:

Commands and

Targets)

ANY MAJOR ERROR

ANY MINOR ERROR

ANY SELF-TESTS

BATTERY FAIL

CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED

DIRECT DEVICE OFF

DIRECT RING BREAK

EQUIPMENT MISMATCH

FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN

IRIG-B FAILURE

LATCHING OUT ERROR

MAINTENANCE ALERT

FIRST ETHERNET FAIL

PROCESS BUS FAILURE

PTP FAILURE

REMOTE DEVICE OFF

RRTD COMM FAIL

SECOND ETHERNET FAIL

THIRD ETHERNET FAIL

SNTP FAILURE

SYSTEM EXCEPTION

TEMP MONITOR

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED

Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)

Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)

Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)

The battery is not functioning. Return power supply module to manufacturer.

Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard

A direct device is configured but not connected

The Direct I/O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring

The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code

A FlexLogic equation is incorrect

"Bad IRIG-B Signal" self-test. See Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.

A difference is detected between the desired and actual latch contact state

A subset of the minor self-test errors generated, see Chapter 7

Link failure detected. See description in

Chapter 7: Commands and targets.

See description in

Chapter 7: Commands and targets

"Bad PTP Signal" self-test as described in Chapter 7

One or more GOOSE devices are not responding

See description in

Chapter 7: Commands and targets

See description in

Chapter 7: Commands and targets

See description in

Chapter 7: Commands and targets

SNTP server is not responding

See description in

Chapter 7: Commands and targets

Monitors ambient temperature and maximum operating temperature

The

Settings > Product Setup > Installation > Relay Settings

setting is

not programmed

TEMPERATURE

MONITOR

TEMP MONITOR

Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum

operating temperature (80°C)

USER-

PROGRAMMABLE

PUSHBUTTONS

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

ANY PB ON

Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position

Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position

Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the “On” position

PUSHBUTTON 2 to 6, 12, or 16

depending on front panel

Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1

Table 5–21: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES

NUMBER OF INPUTS

OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...

NOT

1

input is ‘0’

OR

2 to 16

any input is ‘1’

AND

2 to 16

all inputs are ‘1’

NOR

2 to 16

all inputs are ‘0’

NAND

2 to 16

any input is ‘0’

XOR

2

only one input is ‘1’

Table 5–20: T60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 9 of 9)

OPERAND TYPE

OPERAND SYNTAX

OPERAND DESCRIPTION

«
...
311
312
313
314
315
...
»

Summary of Contents for T60

Page 1: ... AA5 GEK 119568D GE Grid Solutions 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 Internet http www GEGridSolutions com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to ISO 9001 2008 QMI 005094 UL A3775 1601 0090 AA5 GE Grid Solutions LISTED 52TL IND CONT EQ E83849 ...

Page 2: ...ardFiber Multilin and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part number 1601 00...

Page 3: ...0 16 I1 16 PKP_I1 abs I1 k I1mem 0 05pu FLG 3P PKP_I1 NOT PKP_I2 For the ABC rotation phase distance fault type characteristics applied are as follows FLGAB FLG5A OR FLG5B OR abs θ12 60 45 AND PKP_I0 OR PKP_I2 OR PS_3P FLGBC FLG5B OR FLG5C OR abs θ12 180 45 AND PKP_I0 OR PKP_I2 OR PS_3P FLGCA FLG5C OR FLG5A OR abs θ12 300 45 AND PKP_I0 OR PKP_I2 OR PS_3P This means that the first check is if the g...

Page 4: ...GBC 1 Phase distance fault type supervision is suppressed during open pole conditions and for delta connected VTs Fault type supervision is applied to phase distance zone1 to zone 3 only with an option to disable fault type supervision by setting phase distance zone 5 Voltage level setting to non zero value regardless zone 5 is enabled or not G60 and L60 relays are not employing fault type supervi...

Page 5: ...actance I Z V I Z COMP LIMIT Directional I ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT Fault type NOT SLG Removed during open pole conditions Table 0 2 DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS CHARACTERISTIC COMPARATOR INPUTS LIMIT ANGLE Reactance I Z V I Z COMP LIMIT Directional I ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT Right Blinder I ZR V I ZR 90 Left Blinder I ZL V I ZL 90 Fault type NOT SLG Removed during open pole cond...

Page 6: ...vi T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Page 7: ... 17 1 5 3 MENU HIERARCHY 1 17 1 5 4 RELAY ACTIVATION 1 18 1 5 5 RELAY PASSWORDS 1 18 1 5 6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION 1 18 1 5 7 COMMISSIONING 1 19 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 2 SECURITY 2 4 2 1 3 IEC 870 5 103 PROTOCOL 2 8 2 2 ORDER CODES 2 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 9 2 2 2 ORDER CODES WITH ENHANCED CT VT MODULES 2 9 2 2 3 ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES 2 13 2 2 4 REPLAC...

Page 8: ...IST 4 1 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW 4 1 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW 4 3 4 2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 2 1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES 4 4 4 2 2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS 4 8 4 2 3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY 4 10 4 3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 3 1 FACEPLATE 4 13 4 3 2 LED INDICATORS 4 14 4 3 3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS 4 17 4 3 4 DISPLAY 4 22 4 3 5 KEYPAD 4 22 4 3 6 BREAK...

Page 9: ...TANCE 5 181 5 6 4 POWER SWING DETECT ANSI 68 5 201 5 6 5 LOAD ENCROACHMENT 5 211 5 6 6 TRANSFORMER ELEMENTS 5 213 5 6 7 PHASE CURRENT 5 223 5 6 8 NEUTRAL CURRENT 5 234 5 6 9 GROUND CURRENT 5 242 5 6 10 BREAKER FAILURE ANSI 50BF 5 249 5 6 11 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 258 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 7 1 OVERVIEW 5 269 5 7 2 TRIP BUS 5 269 5 7 3 SETTING GROUPS 5 271 5 7 4 SELECTOR SWITCH 5 273 5 7 5 UNDERFREQUEN...

Page 10: ... INPUTS 6 9 6 2 14 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS 6 9 6 2 15 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS 6 10 6 2 16 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS 6 10 6 2 17 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS 6 11 6 2 18 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS 6 11 6 2 19 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL PRP 6 12 6 3 METERING 6 3 1 METERING CONVENTIONS 6 13 6 3 2 TRANSFORMER 6 16 6 3 3 SOURCES 6 17 6 3 4 SYNCHROCHECK 6 22 6 3 5 TRACKING FREQUENCY 6 22 6 3 6 FREQUENCY RAT...

Page 11: ... 3 9 2 2 TEST EXAMPLE 1 9 4 9 2 3 TEST EXAMPLE 2 9 9 9 2 4 TEST EXAMPLE 3 9 10 9 2 5 TEST EXAMPLE 4 9 11 9 3 INRUSH INHIBIT TEST 9 3 1 INRUSH INHIBIT TEST PROCEDURE 9 13 9 4 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST 9 4 1 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST PROCEDURE 9 14 9 5 FREQUENCY ELEMENT TESTS 9 5 1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS 9 15 9 6 COMMISSIONING TEST TABLES 9 6 1 DIFFERENTIAL RESTRAINT T...

Page 12: ...BY IEC 61850 C 2 C 2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C 2 1 OVERVIEW C 3 C 2 2 GGIO1 DIGITAL STATUS VALUES C 3 C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES C 3 C 2 4 GGIO3 DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM GOOSE DATA C 3 C 2 5 GGIO4 GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES C 3 C 2 6 MMXU ANALOG MEASURED VALUES C 4 C 2 7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES C 4 C 3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C 3 1 BUFFERED UNBUFFERED...

Page 13: ...ND D 1 D 1 3 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT D 2 E IEC 60870 5 104 COMMS E 1 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL E 1 1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT E 1 E 1 2 POINT LIST E 9 F DNP COMMUNICATIONS F 1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT F 1 1 DNP V3 00 DEVICE PROFILE F 1 F 1 2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE F 4 F 2 DNP POINT LISTS F 2 1 BINARY INPUT POINTS F 8 F 2 2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT F 9 F 2 3 COUNTERS F 10 F 2 4 ANALOG INPUTS ...

Page 14: ...xiv T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Page 15: ...ust be thoroughly familiar with all safety cau tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country regional utility and plant safety regulations Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers voltage transformers control and test circuit terminals Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to attempting work on the dev...

Page 16: ...are missing contact GE Grid Solutions as fol lows GE GRID SOLUTIONS CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT GE Grid Solutions 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 TELEPHONE Worldwide 1 905 927 7070 Europe Middle East Africa 34 94 485 88 54 North America toll free 1 800 547 8629 FAX 1 905 927 5098 E MAIL Worldwide multilin tech ge com Europe multilin tech euro ge com H...

Page 17: ...YPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard wired contacts Both wet and dry contacts are supported The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR series internal logic signals Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device ...

Page 18: ...the use of objects and classes An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates data A class is the generalized form of similar objects By using this approach one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class such as time overcurrent instantaneous overcurrent current differential undervoltage overvoltage underfrequency ...

Page 19: ... DVD drive The following qualified modems have been tested to be compatible with the T60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met install the software from the GE EnerVista DVD Or download ...

Page 20: ...n The UR device is added to the list of installed intelligent electronic devices IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown Figure 1 5 UR DEVICE ADDED TO LAUNCHPAD WINDOW 1 3 3 CONFIGURING THE T60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a OVERVIEW You connect remotely to the T60 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software The T60 can also be accessed locally wi...

Page 21: ... then select the new site to re open the Device Setup window 6 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 7 Enter a name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 8 Select Serial from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for serial communications Figure 1 6 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9 Enter the COM ...

Page 22: ...Setup window 16 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 17 Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 18 Select Ethernet from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality Figure 1 7 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 19 Enter the relay IP address specified...

Page 23: ...d click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communi cations to the T60 device This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the T60 model number b USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS To use the Quick Connect feature to access the T60 from a computer through Ethernet first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard 1 Press the M...

Page 24: ...indows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list and click the Properties button 4 Click the Use the following IP address box ...

Page 25: ... time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration 5 If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 command Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 1 1 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Approximate round trip time in milliseconds Minimum 0ms Maximum 0...

Page 26: ...nnection specific DNS suffix IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS suffix IP Address 1 1 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway C WINNT Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer 1 Start the Internet Explorer software 2 Select the Tools...

Page 27: ...m the Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list provided and click the Properties button 4 Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown If this computer is used to connect...

Page 28: ...he green status indicator 3 The Display Properties settings can now be edited printed or changed See chapter 4 in this manual or the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are often performed when...

Page 29: ...istrator Supervisor Engineer Operator Observer or Administrator and Supervisor when device authentication is disabled When using a serial connection only device authentication is supported When server authentication is required characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured on the UR This is possible only through the EnerVista software The RADIUS server itself also must ...

Page 30: ...erial cable A shielded twisted pair 20 22 or 24 AWG connects the F485 converter to the T60 rear communications port The converter terminals GND are connected to the T60 communication module COM terminals See the CPU Communica tion Ports section in chapter 3 for details The line is terminated with an R C network that is 120 Ω 1 nF as described in the chapter 3 1 4 3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages a...

Page 31: ... then then 0 then then 0 then then 1 To save the address press the ENTER key 1 5 2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select a header display page top level menu The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages Actual values Settings Commands Targets User displays when enabled 1 5 3 MENU...

Page 32: ... security level and assigned to specific personnel There are two user security access levels COMMAND and SETTING 1 COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes but allows the user to perform the fol lowing operations Change state of virtual inputs Clear event records Clear oscillography records Operate user programmable pushbuttons 2 SETTING The SETTING acce...

Page 33: ... to other devices on the corresponding system 2 Visual verification of active alarms relay display messages and LED indications 3 LED test 4 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion dust or loose wires 5 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Out of service maintenance 1 Check wiring connections for firmness 2 Analog values currents voltages RTDs analog inputs injection test a...

Page 34: ...1 20 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 1 5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED 1 ...

Page 35: ...time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault Several options are available for communication A faceplate RS232 port can be used to connect to a computer for the pro gramming of settings and the monitoring of actual values The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19 2 kbps The rear RS485 port allows independent access by operating and engineering staff It can be connected to sy...

Page 36: ...N 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 50P Phase instantaneous overcurrent 87RGF Restricted ground fault 51G Ground time overcurrent 87T Transformer differential 51N Neutral time overcurrent Table 2 1 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS DEVICE NUMBER FUNCTION DEVICE NUMBER FUNCTION ...

Page 37: ...amps Metering PMU Calculate 2nd and 5th harmonics Harmonic restraint TYPICAL CONFIGURATION the AC signal path is configurable 59N 24 Winding 1 Amps Amps 51N 1 50N 1 51N 2 50N 2 Calculate 3I_0 Calculate 3I_0 Amps 50P 2 51P 2 50P 1 21G 51P 1 21P 50G 1 51G 1 87RGF 1 50G 2 51G 2 87RGF 2 27X 81U 81O Transducer Input TM FlexElement 68 78 67P 67N 3V_0 Amps 50BF 2 50BF 1 49 59P 27P 59X T60 Transformer Pro...

Page 38: ...rity applies depending on purchase b PASSWORD SECURITY Password security is a basic security feature present in the default offering of the product Two levels of password security are provided command and setting The following operations are under command password supervision Changing the state of virtual inputs Clearing the event records Clearing the oscillography records Changing the date and ti...

Page 39: ...on Dial In User Service RADIUS client that is centrally managed enables user attribution provides accounting of all user activities and uses secure standards based strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection A Role Based Access Control RBAC system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR device oper ations and configurations based on specific roles and individ...

Page 40: ...otes R R see table notes R Display Properties RW RW R R R Clear relay records settings RW RW R R R Communications RW RW R R R Modbus user map RW RW R R R Real Time Clock RW RW R R R Oscillography RW RW R R R Data Logger RW RW R R R Demand RW RW R R R User Programmable LEDs RW RW R R R User Programmable self test RW RW R R R Control Pushbuttons RW RW R R R User programmable Pushbuttons RW RW R R R ...

Page 41: ...nalogs RW RW R R R Direct Integers RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Analogs RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Integers RW RW R R R Transducer I O RW RW R R R Testing RW RW R R R Front Panel Labels Designer NA NA NA NA NA Protection Summary NA NA NA NA NA Commands RW RW RW R R Virtual Inputs RW RW RW R R Clear Records RW RW RW R R Set date and time RW RW RW R R User Displays R R R R R Targets R R R R R Actual V...

Page 42: ...displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device nor are they ever transmitted without cryptographic protection CyberSentry Server Authentication The UR has been designed to automatically direct authentication requests based on user names In this respect local account names on the UR are considered as reserved and not used on a RADIUS server The UR automatically detects whether an au...

Page 43: ...d six windings AL CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data EGD and six windings AM CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and six windings AN CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data EGD and six windings AX CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Phasor Measurement Unit PMU and synchrocheck AY CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Phasor Measurement Unit PMU and synchrocheck B0 IEEE 1588 B1 IEEE 1588 and E...

Page 44: ...3 EGD IEC 61850 K6 IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 PMU K7 IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 PMU KA IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 Synchrocheck KB IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 Synchrocheck KK IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 six windings KL IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 six windings EGD KM IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 six windings IEC 61850 KN IEEE1588 PRP IEC 60870 5 103 six windings EGD IEC ...

Page 45: ...bps Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 72 1550 nm single mode Laser 1 Channel 73 1550 nm single mode Laser 2 Channel 74 Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 75 Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 1 Channel 77 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 2 Channels 7A 820 nm multimode LED 1 Channel 7B 1300 nm multimode LED 1 Ch...

Page 46: ...rSentry Lvl 1 six windings Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 FX PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 PMU and Synchrocheck FY PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 PMU IEC 61850 and Synchrocheck G0 IEEE 1588 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl 1 G1 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data G3 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 G4 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 G6 IEEE 1588 PRP Cyber...

Page 47: ...monitoring latching outputs 8 digital inputs TRANSDUCER INPUTS OUTPUTS select a maximum of 3 per unit 5A 5A 5A 4 DCmA inputs 4 DCmA outputs only one 5A module is allowed 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD inputs 5D 5D 5D 4 RTD inputs 4 DCmA outputs only one 5D module is allowed 5E 5E 5E 4 RTD inputs 4 DCmA inputs 5F 5F 5F 8 DCmA inputs INTER RELAY COMMUNICATIONS select a maximum of 1 per unit For the last module rear...

Page 48: ...and IEC 61850 EN IEEE 1588 PRP six windings Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 EX IEEE 1588 PRP PMU and Synchrocheck EY IEEE 1588 PRP PMU IEC 61850 and Synchrocheck F0 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1 F1 PRP CyberSentry Lvl1 and Ethernet Global Data F3 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 F4 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 F6 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and PMU F7 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 I...

Page 49: ...digital inputs 6K 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6M 6M 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6N 6N 4 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 8 digital inputs 6P 6P 6 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 4 digital inputs 6R 6R 2 Form A no monitoring and 2 For...

Page 50: ...da E3 IEEE 1588 PRP and IEC 61850 E4 IEEE 1588 PRP Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 E6 IEEE 1588 PRP and PMU E7 IEEE 1588 PRP IEC 61850 and PMU EA IEEE 1588 PRP and Synchrocheck EB IEEE 1588 PRP IEC 61850 and Synchrocheck EK IEEE 1588 PRP and six windings EL IEEE 1588 PRP six windings and Ethernet Global Data EM IEEE 1588 PRP six windings and IEC 61850 EN IEEE 1588 PRP six windings Ethernet Glob...

Page 51: ... 8 Form C outputs 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 digital inputs 6H 6 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 4 digital inputs 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6M 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 4...

Page 52: ... C outputs 8 contact inputs 6B 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 4 Form C outputs 4 contact inputs 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 16 contact inputs 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 contact inputs 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 contact inputs 6H 6 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 4 contact inputs 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 2 Form A curre...

Page 53: ...nt with optional voltage outputs 8 contact inputs 6P 6 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 4 contact inputs 6R 2 Form A no monitoring and 2 Form C outputs 8 contact inputs 6S 2 Form A no monitoring and 4 Form C outputs 4 contact inputs 6T 4 Form A no monitoring outputs 8 contact inputs 6U 6 Form A no monitoring outputs 4 contact inputs 6V 2 Form A outputs 1 Form C output 2 Form A no monit...

Page 54: ...60 Hz systems and 3200 Hz in 50 Hz sys tems The sampling rate is dynamically adjusted to the actual system frequency by an accurate and fast frequency tracking system The A D converter has the following ranges of AC signals Voltages EQ 2 1 Currents From CT VT U I Analog Inputs Analog low pass filter Analog to Digital Converter A Digital band pass filter DSP module Phasor estimation cycle Fourier 1...

Page 55: ... the same direction negative to positive Voltage or current samples are pre filtered using a Finite Impulse Response FIR digital filter to remove high frequency noise contained in the signal The period is used after several security conditions are met such as true RMS signal must be above 6 nominal for a certain time and others If these security conditions are not met the last valid measurement is...

Page 56: ...ed whichever is greater for two windings setup INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL Pickup level 2 00 to 30 00 pu in steps of 0 01 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading or 1 of rated whichever is greater for two windings setup Operate time 20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz PHASE DISTANCE Characteristic mho memory polarized or offset or quad memory polarized or non direc tional selectable i...

Page 57: ...series compensation applications 0 to 5 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Operation time 1 to 1 5 cycles typical Reset time 1 power cycle typical RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT Pickup 0 005 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 1 to 2 0 x CT rating 0 5 of reading or 1 of rated which ever is greater 2 0 x CT rating 1 5 of reading Slope 0 to 100 in steps of 1 Pickup delay 0 to 6...

Page 58: ... level 102 to 103 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V Curve shapes GE IAV Inverse Definite Time Curve multiplier Time Dial 0 to 600 00 in steps of 0 01 Curve timing accuracy at 0 90 x pickup 3 5 of operate time or 1 2 cycle whichever is greater from pickup to operate Operate time 30 ms at 0 9 pickup at 60 Hz for Defi nite Time mode PHASE OVERVOLTAGE Voltage Phasor only Pickup ...

Page 59: ... 001 Pickup delay 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Reset delay 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 1 4 cycle whichever is greater 95 settling time for df dt 24 cycles Operate time typically 9 5 cycles at 2 pickup typically 8 5 cycles at 3 pickup typically 6 5 cycles at 5 pickup Typical times are average operate times including variables such as frequency change insta...

Page 60: ... greater Timer accuracy hot curve 500 ms or 2 whichever is greater for Ip 0 9 k Ib and I k Ib 1 1 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION Pickup level 1 to 200 C Dropout level 2 C of pickup Time delay 10 s Elements trip and alarm TRIP BUS TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC Number of elements 6 Number of inputs 16 Operate time 2 ms at 60 Hz Timer accuracy 3 or 10 ms whichever is greater 2 4 2 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS FLEXLOGI...

Page 61: ...time out or acknowledge Time out timer 3 0 to 60 0 s in steps of 0 1 Control inputs step up and 3 bit Power up mode restore from non volatile memory or syn chronize to a 3 bit control input or synch restore mode DIGITAL ELEMENTS Number of elements 48 Operating signal any FlexLogic operand Pickup delay 0 000 to 999999 999 s in steps of 0 001 Dropout delay 0 000 to 999999 999 s in steps of 0 001 Tim...

Page 62: ...EAL POWER WATTS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading at 1 0 PF 0 8 and 0 8 PF 10 REACTIVE POWER VARS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading at 0 2 PF 0 2 APPARENT POWER VA Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading WATT HOURS POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE Accuracy 2 0 of reading Range 0 to 1 106...

Page 63: ...e time 0 0 to 16 0 ms in steps of 0 5 Continuous current draw 4 mA when energized Auto burnish impulse current 50 to 70 mA Duration of auto burnish impulse 25 to 50 ms DCMA INPUTS Current input mA DC 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 20 4 to 20 programmable Input impedance 379 Ω 10 Conversion range 1 to 20 mA DC Accuracy 0 2 of full scale Type Passive RTD INPUTS Types 3 wire 100 Ω Platinum ...

Page 64: ...e con sumption INTERNAL FUSE RATINGS Low range power supply 8 A 250 V High range power supply 4 A 250 V INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AC 100 000 A RMS symmetrical DC 10 000 A 2 4 7 OUTPUTS FORM A RELAY Make and carry for 0 2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37 90 Carry continuous 6 A Break DC inductive L R 40 ms Operate time 4 ms Contact material silver alloy LATCHING RELAY Make and carry for 0 2 s 30 A as per ANSI C3...

Page 65: ... to 1 mA 0 to 1 mA 4 to 20 mA Max load resistance 12 kΩ for 1 to 1 mA range 12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range 600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range Accuracy 0 75 of full scale for 0 to 1 mA range 0 5 of full scale for 1 to 1 mA range 0 75 of full scale for 0 to 20 mA range 99 Settling time to a step change 100 ms Isolation 1 5 kV Driving signal any FlexAnalog quantity Upper and lower limit for the driving signal 90 ...

Page 66: ...238TM2011 Slave only ordinary clock Peer delay measurement mechanism PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL PRP IEC 62439 3 CLAUSE 4 2012 Ethernet ports used 2 and 3 Networks supported 10 100 MB Ethernet OTHER TFTP HTTP IEC 60870 5 104 Ethernet Global Data EGD 2 4 9 INTER RELAY COMMUNICATIONS SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consider...

Page 67: ... 5 125 μm 16 dBm 32 dBm 16 dBm 8 dBm 50 125 μm 20 dBm 12 dBm 1300 nm Multimode 62 5 125 μm 16 dBm 32 dBm 16 dBm 8 dBm 50 125 μm 20 dBm 12 dBm 1300 nm Single mode 9 125 μm 15 dBm 32 dBm 17 dBm 8 dBm 1300 nm Laser Single mode 9 125 μm 0 dBm 34 dBm 34 dBm 8 dBm 1550 nm Laser Single mode 9 125 μm 5 dBm 34 dBm 39 dBm 10 dBm EMITTER FIBER TYPE TRANSMIT POWER RECEIVED SENSITIVITY POWER BUDGET MAX OPTICAL...

Page 68: ...riant 1 6 days OTHER Altitude 2000 m maximum Pollution degree II Overvoltage category II Ingress protection IP20 front IP10 back Noise 0 dB Typical distances listed are based on the follow ing assumptions for system loss As actual losses vary from one installation to another the distance covered by your system may vary CONNECTOR LOSSES TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS ST connector 0 7 dB each FIBER LOSSES 820 n...

Page 69: ...pple DC IEC 60255 11 12 ripple 200 ms interrupts Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 CISPR22 IEC 60255 25 Class A Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255 21 1 Class 1 Shock and bump IEC 60255 21 2 Class 1 Seismic IEC 60255 21 3 Class 1 Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 8 Level 5 Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 9 Level 4 Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 10 Level 4 Voltage dip and interruption...

Page 70: ...eaning is not required but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display a dry cloth can be used To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO CE Low voltage directive EN 60255 5 EMC directive EN 60255 26 EN 50263 EN 61000 6 5 ...

Page 71: ... the removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits...

Page 72: ...ting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi flush with the panel or switchgear door allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four sc...

Page 73: ...58 243 4 mm 7 00 177 7 mm 4 00 101 6 mm 7 10 180 2 mm 13 66 347 0 mm 14 03 356 2 mm 0 20 5 1 mm 1 55 39 3 mm 4 Places 0 213 5 41 mm Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Front View Vertical Enhanced Top View Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel CUTOUT Front of Panel Reference only Terminal Blocks Front Bezel Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Side View 843809A2 cdr ...

Page 74: ... UR Device Instruction Sheet GEK 113182 Connecting a Remote UR V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically Mounted Horizontal UR Device Instruction Sheet For side mounting T60 devices with the standard front panel use the following figures 13 72 348 5 mm 7 00 177 8 mm 13 50 342 9 mm Front of panel Front bezel Panel Mounting bracket 1 57 39 9 mm 4 00 101 6 7 13 181 1 mm 0 46 11 7 mm 13 65 346 7 mm 14 40...

Page 75: ...O PANEL 10 32 NYLOCK NUT P N 1422 1032 4 PLACES 8 3 8 PAN PHILIPS HEAD BLACK OXIDE SCREW P N 1408 0306 8 PLACES TO MOUNT THE UNIT 8 LOCKWASHER EXTERNAL TOOTH P N 1435 0002 8 PLACES TO MOUNT STEP 4 ASSEMBLE UR V UNIT TO MOUNTING BRACKETS UR V UNIT STEP 1 CREATE THE HOLES AND CUT OUT INTO THE PANEL AS PER DRAWING 843753 PLUG THE DISPLAY CABLE INTO THE FRONT BEZEL BEFORE MOUNTING THE UNIT ON THE PANE...

Page 76: ...NG REAR DIMENSIONS STANDARD PANEL C U T O U T 1 33 33 9 2 83 71 9 6 66 169 2 12 20 309 9 0 159 DIA 6 PLACES 4 0 0 213 DIA 5 4 4 PLACES SEE HOLES MARKED X INCHES MILLIMETERS 5 33 135 4 PANEL SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY VIEWED FROM FRONT X X X X 1 00 25 4 1 00 25 4 10 05 255 3 0 04 1 0 0 68 17 3 5 27 133 8 843753A3 cdr ...

Page 77: ...wing figure for an example of rear terminal assignments Figure 3 9 EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS X W V U T S P N M L K J H G F B R 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 b 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 a a b c a b c a b c a b c Optional direct input output module CPU module T module shown Optional contact input output module CT VT module Power supply module Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 828784A3 CDR Optional CT VT or contact input ou...

Page 78: ...he back of the relay chassis screws a b c shown is 9 inch pounds For the connections to the terminal blocks rows 1 to 8 use a minimum of 17 inch pounds During manufacturing the power supply and CPU modules are installed in slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch pounds of torque on the screws at the top and bottom of the modules ...

Page 79: ...ES MUST BE GROUNDED IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED U6a U8a U5b U7b U5a U7a U6c U8c U5c U7c CONTACT INPUT U1a CONTACT INPUT U4c COMMON U5b COMMON U7b COMMON U1b CONTACT INPUT U2a CONTACT INPUT U5a CONTACT INPUT U3c CONTACT INPUT U6a CONTACT INPUT U8a CONTACT INPUT U1c CONTACT INPUT U3a CONTACT INPUT U5c CONTACT INPUT U7c CONTACT INPUT U7a CONTACT INPUT U2c SURGE CONTACT INPUT U4a CONTACT INPUT U6c CONTACT...

Page 80: ...connections The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay see the Typical wiring diagram earlier The critical failure relay is a form C device that is energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self test failures If on going self test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure se...

Page 81: ...ground current input that is the same as the phase current input Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used CT VT modules with a sensitiv...

Page 82: ...round connection to neutral must be on the source side UNSHIELDED CABLE LOAD A B C N G Ground outside CT Source LOAD SHIELDED CABLE 996630A6 CDR A B C Source To ground must be on load side Stress cone shields NOTE 1a 1b 1c 2a 2b 2c 3a 4a 5a 6a 7a 8a 3b 4b 5c 6c 7c 8c 3c 4c Current inputs 8F 8G 8L and 8M modules 4 CTs and 4 VTs Voltage inputs VA VB VC VX VA VB VC VX IA IC IB IG IA5 IC5 IB5 IG5 IA1 ...

Page 83: ...rn and two inputs per common return When a contact input output module is ordered four inputs per com mon is used If the inputs must be isolated per row then two inputs per common return should be selected 4D module The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types 6A etc and contact arrangements that can be ordered for the relay Since an entire row is used for a single co...

Page 84: ... con tinue to read the form A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened when measured as an impedance The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set and connect the form A contact through a voltage dropping resistor to a DC voltage source If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source a 500 Ω 10 W resistor is appropriate In...

Page 85: ...A 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Fast Form C 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Form A 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Fast Form C 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Fast Form C 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 6K MODULE 6L MODULE 6M MODULE 6N MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT 1 Form C 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Form A 2 Form C 2 Form ...

Page 86: ... 6 Solid State 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Form A 7 Not Used 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Form A 8 Solid State 4B MODULE 4C MODULE 4D MODULE 4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT 1 Not Used 1 Not Used 1a 1c 2 Inputs 1 2 Outputs 2 Solid State 2 Solid State 2a 2c 2 Inputs 2 2 Outputs 3 Not Used 3 Not Used 3a 3c 2 ...

Page 87: ...GE Multilin T60 Transformer Protection System 3 17 3 HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 Figure 3 15 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING 1 of 2 842762A3 CDR ...

Page 88: ...IN 8c COMMON 7b SURGE 8c 7c 8b I V I V I V I V DIGITAL I O 6N 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 5c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 6a CONTACT IN 8c CONTACT IN 6c COMMON 7b COMMON 5b SURGE 8c 7c 8b DIGITAL I O 6T 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7...

Page 89: ...ect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output We recommend using an external DC supply GENERAL APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS Contacts outputs of protective relays auxiliary contacts from breakers disconnectors and other devices are generally con nected to contacts inputs of protective relays In some situations the contact outputs of some protective relays can have high impedance conn...

Page 90: ...ce and the input impedance of the contact input If the duration is greater than the debounce time setting then the contact input operates The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this problem by connecting a resistor across the contact input as shown in the next figure or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the discharge time to prevent spurious ope...

Page 91: ...value of this resistor R is calculated as follows 1 Determine the minimum voltage V threshold required to turn on the input This is determined by direct measurement or referenced in the input specifications 2 Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1 3 V threshold when the contact is OFF the non activated state as follows R Vthreshold 3 2 mA EQ 3 2 The 2 mA current is used in ca...

Page 92: ...n 3 2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE 3 Vresistor 2 mA 14 Kohm 28 V Vresistor contact input threshold 84 V EQ 3 5 In conclusion in this example the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input AND when a battery ground is present ...

Page 93: ...uto burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed Then within 25 to 50 ms this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con tacts allowing for proper sensing of state changes If the external device contact is bouncing the auto burnishing starts when external device contact bouncin...

Page 94: ...ondition During Low impedance state contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow fast discharge of the stray capacitance of the long cables When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance value If voltage starts rapidly decreasing this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input If h...

Page 95: ...ucer input output module has a total of 24 terminal connections These connections are arranged as three ter minals per row with a total of eight rows A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs with terminals in column a having positive polarity and terminals in column c having negative polarity Since an entire row is used for a single input output channel the name of the channel is assig...

Page 96: ...3 26 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 3 2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE 3 Figure 3 23 TRANSDUCER INPUT OUTPUT MODULE WIRING The following figure show how to connect RTDs 842764A1 CDR ...

Page 97: ...Setup software provided with the relay Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps Figure 3 25 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION Three wire shielded cable RTD terminals Maximum total lead resistance 25 ohms for Platinum RTDs Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors RTD 85973...

Page 98: ...d together Though data is transmitted over a two wire twisted pair all RS485 devices require a shared reference or common voltage This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common Some systems allow the shield drain wire to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the T60 COM terminal 3 others function cor rectly only if the common wire is connected to the T60 COM terminal but in...

Page 99: ...h communication ports An iso lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling To ensure maximum reliability all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown below Figure 3 27 RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c 100BASE FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS Ensure that the dust covers are instal...

Page 100: ...tions can be synchronized Figure 3 28 OPTIONS FOR THE IRIG B CONNECTION Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping The T60 is intended for use with external clocks that set the IRIG B control bits according to IEEE Std C37 118 1 2011 When used with a source that sets the IRIG B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344 1995 the source must have the sign of ...

Page 101: ...ANNEL CONNECTION IRC modules with protocol C37 94 and G 703 are designed for back to back communication connections so the ring con figuration shown in the previous figure does not apply To establish inter relay communication in more than two URs you need to have two channel IRC module and enable DIRECT I O CHANNEL CROSSOVER function in all relays as shown in the next figure This configuration can...

Page 102: ... communication modules UR2 has a dual channel module The two communication chan nels can be of different types depending on the Type 7 modules used To allow the direct input and output data to cross over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2 the DIRECT I O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2 This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2 and messages received on Rx2 out Tx...

Page 103: ...nd 7J fiber only modules Figure 3 33 LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3 3 3 FIBER LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72 73 7D and 7K fiber laser modules Figure 3 34 7X LASER FIBER MODULES 7A 7B and 7C modules 7H 7I and 7J modules 1 channel 2 channels Rx1 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx1 Tx2 831719A3 CDR 1 channel 2 channels Rx1 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx1 Tx2 831720A5 CDR 72 and 7D modules 73 an...

Page 104: ... kbps The SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O DIRECT I O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to this module AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections with the shield grounded only at one end Con necting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground Thus if pin X1a or X6a is used to ground the shield at one end do not gr...

Page 105: ... the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards 5 Set the timing selection switches channel 1 channel 2 to the desired timing modes 6 Replace the top cover and the cover screw 7 Re insert the G 703 module Take care...

Page 106: ...nections For back to back connections set for octet timing S1 OFF and timing mode to internal timing S5 ON and S6 OFF Loop Timing Mode The system clock is derived from the received line signal Therefore the G 703 timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems For connection to a higher order system UR to multiplexer factory defaults set to octet timing S1 ON...

Page 107: ...al loopback mode the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module Likewise G 703 data enters the G 703 ...

Page 108: ... clock input for the two RS422 channels The system functions correctly when the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature Terminal timing is a common fea ture to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source Using the terminal timing feature two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are fo...

Page 109: ...re proper system operation For example the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit Figure 3 44 CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS Data module 1 Data module 2 Signal name Signal name SD A Send data TT A Terminal timing TT B Terminal timing SD B Send data RD A Received data RD A Received data SD A Send data SD B Send data RD B Received data RD B Received dat...

Page 110: ... When using a LASER Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver Figure 3 45 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE data communications equipment units 3 3 7 G 703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G 703 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at...

Page 111: ...iber optic connector type ST Wavelength 820 40 nm Connection as per all fiber optic connections a Tx to Rx connection is required The UR series C37 94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37 94 standard shown as follows The UR series C37 94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface G 703 RS422 or X 21 of...

Page 112: ...ecord the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards 5 Set the timing s...

Page 113: ... as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098...

Page 114: ...8 kbps The specifications for the module are as follows Emulated IEEE standard emulates C37 94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface modules set to n 1 or 64 kbps Fiber optic cable type 9 125 μm core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode single mode ELED compatible with HP HFBR 1315T transmitter and HP HFBR 2316T receiver Fiber optic cable length up to 11 4 km Fiber optic connector type ST Wavel...

Page 115: ...the C37 94SM module modules 2A or 2B as follows Record the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the...

Page 116: ...as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098 ...

Page 117: ...id data packet Solid red switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each yellow bit Solid red FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid ...

Page 118: ...3 48 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 3 3 DIRECT INPUT OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE 3 ...

Page 119: ...inition are required See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Software section in Chapter 1 for details 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software can be used in online mode relay connected to directly communicate with the T60 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites Sit...

Page 120: ...tension that had been removed from the Settings List tree menu it is added back to the Settings List tree menu Drag and Drop The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device order code compatible files or individual menu items Also the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file ...

Page 121: ...sage intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components 1 Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view 2 Main window menu bar 3 Main wi...

Page 122: ... procedure describes how to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue The settings file is now in template ed...

Page 123: ...n below Figure 4 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 5 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 6 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings The next time that the device settings are accessed only those specified as viewable editable display in the menu hierarchy c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE GE recommends that templates b...

Page 124: ...ings with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 3 Right click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 4 Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template Once the template has been applied users are limited to vi...

Page 125: ...mited to edit the settings specified by the template but all settings are shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 4 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE Once a settings template is removed it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use 3 Right click t...

Page 126: ...ntries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 If prompted enter the template password 3 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background The icon on the up...

Page 127: ...ew as shown below and on the front panel display Figure 4 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number Once FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number A serial number is viewable un...

Page 128: ... date time and serial number of the T60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC This infor mation can be compared with the T60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the T60 device or obtained from ...

Page 129: ...f any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a T60 device The T60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the exa...

Page 130: ...EL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceability...

Page 131: ... Setup software The front panel interface consists of LED panels an RS232 port keypad LCD display control pushbuttons and optional user programmable pushbuttons The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel The following figure shows the horizontal arra...

Page 132: ...e SETTINGS INPUT OUTPUTS RESETTING menu The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature Figure 4 18 TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is applied all monitored inputs outputs and internal systems are OK and t...

Page 133: ...cludes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A B or C LEDs VOLTAGE This LED indicates voltage was involved CURRENT This LED indicates current was involved FREQUENCY This LED indicates frequency was involved OTHER This LED indicates a composite function was ...

Page 134: ...on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A B or C LEDs This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands ...

Page 135: ...r are not pre programmed To match the pre printed label the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User programmable LEDs section of chapter 5 The LEDs are fully user programmable The default labels can be replaced by user printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section Figure 4 21 LED PANEL 2 DEFAULT LABELS 4 3 3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS a ENHANCED FACEPLATE The followin...

Page 136: ...sert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures These tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user The label package shipped with every T60 contains the three default labels shown below the custom label template she...

Page 137: ... procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the T60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay 2 Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the LED label ...

Page 138: ...he pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the user programmable pushbutton labels from the T60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath as shown below Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay ...

Page 139: ...CEPLATE INTERFACE 4 2 Slide the label tool under the user programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the user programmable pushbutton label 3 Remove the tool and attached user programmable pushbutton label as shown below ...

Page 140: ...natively val ues can be entered with the numeric keypad The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages The ENTER key stores altered setting values When entering an IP address on the front panel key in the first sequence of the number then press the key for the deci ...

Page 141: ...o breakers 4 3 7 MENUS a NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select a header display page top level menu The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages Actual values Settings ENTER COMMAND PASSWORD This message appears when the USER 1 USER 2 or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND PASSWORD is...

Page 142: ...t Actual Values page appears This page contains system and relay status information Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears This page contains settings to configure the relay SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page This pag...

Page 143: ...e the VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection c ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length but user defined in character They can be upper case letters lower case letters numerals and a selection of special characters FLASH MESSAGE TIME 1 0 s For example select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting MINIMUM 0 5 MAXIM...

Page 144: ... key until the SECURITY message appears on the display 3 Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display 4 Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message is displayed 5 After the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message appears on the display press the VALUE keys change the selection to Programmed 6 Press the ENTER key 7 When the NEW SETTI...

Page 145: ...type in the same password and press ENTER 9 When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears your new Setting or Command Password will be active f CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception A message prompts you to type in the existing password for each security level before a new password can be enter...

Page 146: ...4 28 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 4 3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 ...

Page 147: ...e 5 66 USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT See page 5 71 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5 72 DATA LOGGER See page 5 75 DEMAND See page 5 76 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS See page 5 77 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS See page 5 81 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 81 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 84 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS See page 5 88 USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS See page 5 89 DIRECT I O See page 5 91 TELEPROTECTION S...

Page 148: ...C FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR See page 5 173 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS See page 5 173 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5 174 NON VOLATILE LATCHES See page 5 179 SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 See page 5 180 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS See page 5 269 SETTING GROUPS See page 5 271 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5 273 UNDERFREQUENCY See page 5 279 OVERFREQUENCY See page 5 280 FR...

Page 149: ...TPUTS See page 5 317 REMOTE DEVICES See page 5 317 REMOTE INPUTS See page 5 318 REMOTE DPS INPUTS See page 5 319 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS See page 5 320 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS See page 5 320 RESETTING See page 5 320 DIRECT INPUTS See page 5 321 DIRECT OUTPUTS See page 5 321 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 324 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 5 326 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 5 327 SE...

Page 150: ...logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F Some settings are specified in per unit pu calculated quantities pu quantity actual quantity base quantity Where the current source is from a single CT the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT Use the secondary current base to convert per unit current settings to from a secondary current value and use the primary cur rent base...

Page 151: ...operation of the element When set to Self Reset the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element and self resets once the operate element condition clears When set to Latched the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay EVENTS setting This setting is used to control ...

Page 152: ...the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an AC source This source can be given a specific name through the settings and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly fo...

Page 153: ...ntion is based on the physical location of the channels required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT VT module is mounted as the first character followed by numbers indicating the channel either 1 or 5 See the HardFiber instruction manual for designations of HardFiber voltage and curren...

Page 154: ... using a recognizable corporate email account Customer service provides a code to reset the relay to the factory defaults 2 Enter the reset code on the front panel under COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE SERVICE COMMAND 3 Change the default password of ChangeMe1 as outlined in the Setting Up CyberSentry and Changing Default Pass word section in the first chapter PASSWORD REQUIREMENTS A user account requi...

Page 155: ...Vista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout The state of the session local or remote setting or command determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands ACCESS LOC SETG OFF Asserted when local setting access is disabled ACCESS LOC SETG ON Asserted when local setting access is enabled ACCESS LOC CMND OFF Asserted when local command access is disabled ACCESS LOC...

Page 156: ...ION PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION The following access supervision settings are available INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three minute time span before lockout occurs When lockout occurs the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On These operands ar...

Page 157: ...s as normal that is a local setting password is required If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand then the operand must be asserted set as on prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access If setting access is not authorized for local operation front panel or RS232 interface and the user attempts to obtain setting access then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message i...

Page 158: ...ccess Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off The state of the Flex Logic operand is continuously monitored for an off to on transition When this occurs remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorized Timeo...

Page 159: ...ed to enter a username and password ADDING A NEW USER The following pre requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system The user adding the account must have administrator rights The EnerVista security management system must be enabled previous section To add user accounts 1 Select the Security User Management menu item to open the user management window 2 ...

Page 160: ...tual values Settings Allows the user to read setting values Commands Allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges When any of the Settings Event Recorder and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves...

Page 161: ...stomer enabled features are open All the other ports are closed For example Modbus is on by default so its TCP port number 502 is open But if Modbus is disabled port 502 is closed This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found open When CyberSentry is enabled Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted which is not always tolerated by SCADA systems The UR has a bypass acces...

Page 162: ...S authentication port 1 65535 1812 Administrator Primary Accounting Port RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 Administrator Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS vendor specific attributes used with the protocol Value that represents General Electric Administrator RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret Shared secret used in authentication It displays as asterisks This setting must meet the Cyb...

Page 163: ...isabled To re enable device authentication the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting changes and then the Administrator can re enable device authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled Administrator Firmware Locked Indicates if the device receives firmware upgrades If Yes and the firmware upgrade attempt is made the device denies the upgrade and displays an error message that the lock is set On ea...

Page 164: ...e Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not approve changes after the fact Only Supervisor can set the Settings and Firmware Lock in the Security Settings This role also has the ability to forcefully logoff any other role and clear the security event log This role can also be disabled but only through a Supervisor authentication When this role is disabled its...

Page 165: ...upervisor approval can change the role associated password In CyberSentry password encryption is not supported Session Settings PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY SESSION SETTINGS The following session settings are available SESSION LOCKOUT This setting specifies the number of failed authentications the default is three and the maxi mum is 99 before the device blocks subsequent authentication at...

Page 166: ...s the Bypass Access feature for such situations which allows unencrypted Modbus over Ethernet Setting it to Remote ensures no authentication is required over Ethernet and Modbus communication is unen crypted Only a Supervisor or Administrator if Supervisor role is disabled can enable this feature Note that other protocols DNP 101 103 104 EGD are not encrypted and they are good communications optio...

Page 167: ...with the Session Lockout threshold When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded a minor alarm indication comes up Operand is AUTHENTICA TION FAIL FIRMWARE LOCK When Enabled any firmware upgrade attempt brings up a minor self test alarm Operand is UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT SETTINGS LOCK When Enabled an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates a minor self test alarm Operand is U...

Page 168: ... as user names Administra tor Supervisor Engineer Operator Observer in the RADIUS server If you do the UR relay automatically provides the authentication from the device 4 In the EnerVista software choose server authentication and log in using the user name and password configured on the RADIUS server for server authentication login 5 After making any required changes log out When changing setting...

Page 169: ...tication with origin information username and IP MAC address a time stamp in UTC time when it occurred AUTH_LOCKOUT ORIGIN TIMESTAMP Error 3 An authentication lockout has occurred because of too many failed authentication attempts FIRMWARE_UPGD ORIGIN TIMESTAMP Warning 4 Indicates that a change of firmware has occurred FIRMWARE_LOCK ORIGIN TIMESTAMP Critical 1 An attempt was made to change firmwar...

Page 170: ...ry susceptible to noise Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal The T60 applies a cut off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents If the magnitude is below the cut off level it is substi tuted with zero This applies to phase and ground current phasors...

Page 171: ...00 A 13811 2 V 66 4 V 720 5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut off will not be displayed As well the three phase energy data will not accumu late if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut off Lower the VOLTAGE CUT OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower sig nals as valid measurements Unless dictated otherwise by a specific ...

Page 172: ...gramma ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required For example to assign user programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records the following settings should be applied 1 Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu CLEAR DEMAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON 2 Set the properties for user programmable pushbutton ...

Page 173: ... either RS485 or RRTD communications COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS See page 5 27 MESSAGE NETWORK See page 5 31 MESSAGE ROUTING See page 5 33 MESSAGE MODBUS PROTOCOL See page 5 36 MESSAGE PROTOCOL DNP 3 0 Range DNP 3 0 IEC 60870 5 104 IEC 60870 5 103 MESSAGE DNP PROTOCOL See page 5 38 MESSAGE DNP IEC104 POINT LISTS See page 5 41 MESSAGE IEC 61850 PROTOCOL See page 5 42 MESSAGE WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCO...

Page 174: ...ose The port is strictly dedicated to RRTD usage when COM2 USAGE is selected as RRTD Power must be cycled to the T60 for changes to the COM2 USAGE setting to take effect c ETHERNET NETWORK TOPOLOGY The T60 has three Ethernet ports Each Ethernet port must belong to a different network or subnetwork Configure the IP address and subnet to ensure that each port meets this requirement Two subnets are d...

Page 175: ... used for the three IP addresses makes them belong to the same network of 10 x x x Single LAN No Redundancy The topology shown in the following figure allows communications to SCADA local configuration monitoring through EnerVista and access to the public network shared on the same LAN No redundancy is provided Figure 5 4 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE LAN EnerVista Software ML3000 Public Networ...

Page 176: ...3 uses the IP and MAC address of P2 Figure 5 5 MULTIPLE LANS WITH REDUNDANCY Multiple LANS No Redundancy The following topology provides local configuration monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1 to which port 1 P1 is connected access to the public network on LAN2 to which port 2 P2 is connected and communications with SCADA on LAN3 to which port 3 P3 is connected There is no redundancy Fig...

Page 177: ...RT2 REDUNDANCY determines if ports 2 and 3 operate in redundant or independent mode If a license for PRP was pur chased the options are None Failover and PRP If a license for PRP was not purchased the available options are None and Failover In non redundant mode REDUNDANCY set to None ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC IP and mask addresses If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover the ...

Page 178: ...hat does not conflict with another multicast protocol e FAR END FAULT INDICATION FEFI Since 100BASE FX does not support Auto Negotiation a Far End Fault Indication FEFI feature is included in UR 7 that allows for detection of link failures The purpose of the Far End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there is a problem with one of the fibers...

Page 179: ...ed to align PRP with the High availability Seamless Redundancy HSR protocol To achieve this the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 ver sion The revised standard IEC 62439 3 2012 is commonly referred to as PRP 1 while the original standard is PRP 0 The UR relays support only PRP 1 The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports specifically Port 2 ...

Page 180: ... by Static Routes To delete a route 1 Replace the route destination with the default loopback address 127 0 0 1 When deleting a route the mask and gateway must be also brought back to default values 2 Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127 0 0 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED BY STATIC ROUTES The following rules are validated internally The route m...

Page 181: ...1 1 1 Port 2 IP address 10 1 2 2 connects the UR to LAN 10 1 2 0 24 and to the EnerVista software through Router 2 Router 2 has an interface on 10 1 2 0 24 and the IP address of this interface is 10 1 2 1 The configuration before release 7 10 was as follows PRT1 IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 2 PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 255 0 PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 1 PRT2 IP ADDRESS 10 1 2 2 PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 2...

Page 182: ...nce with protocol specifications for broadcast messages never replies Addresses do not have to be sequential but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors occur Generally each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1 When using Modbus TCP IP the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field Se...

Page 183: ...G DNP CHANNEL 1 2 PORT SETTINGS RS232 RS485 ETHERNET DNP Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 none Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth UDP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 RS485 Modbus DNP DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Ch...

Page 184: ...100000 MESSAGE DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP PF SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 1...

Page 185: ...ing is set to Network UDP the channel 1 DNP protocol can be used over UDP IP on the Ethernet ports See the DNP appendix for information on the DNP protocol Changes to these settings take effect when power has been cycled to the relay Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave ...

Page 186: ...data These settings group the T60 analog input data into the following types current voltage power energy power factor and other Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type For example to trigger unsolic ited responses from the T60 when any current values change by 15 A the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15 Note that these sett...

Page 187: ...STS Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870 5 104 protocol can be configured The value for each point is user programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic operands for binary inputs MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs MME points The menu for the binary input points DNP or MSP points IEC 60870 5 1...

Page 188: ...mes utilizing 61850 messaging it can be desirable to route 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications or to use redundant inde pendent ports and a high speed network recovery method such as PRP The T60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS protocol as specified by IEC 61850 MMS is supported over two protocol stacks TCP IP over Ethernet The T60 operates as an IEC 6185...

Page 189: ...t time interval The DEFAULT GSSE GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE fixed T60 GOOSE and configurable GOOSE The GSSE settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSEE These settings are applicable to GSSE only If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled GSSE messages are not transmitted The GSSE ID setting repre...

Page 190: ...revious to 5 0x the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address that is the unique local MAC address of the T60 and setting the multicast bit The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selecti...

Page 191: ...sets 1 through 8 the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message The T60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of th...

Page 192: ... the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices The general steps required for transmission configuration are 1 Configure the transmission dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data The general steps required for reception configuration are 1 Configure the reception dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data Table 5...

Page 193: ...d must match the configuration on the receiver the default value is 0 Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7 2 For this example it can be left at its default value 3 Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTO COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to...

Page 194: ...ned by the GGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal value in the sending device The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software For intercommunication between T60 IEDs the fixed DNA UserSt dataset can be used The DNA UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GS...

Page 195: ...e two data items The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands First the REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 that is the first configurable dataset Then REMOTE IN 1 16 ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2 These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance w...

Page 196: ...n the T60 is restarted Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client server functionality is not required IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality GOOSE GSSE inter device communication and client server communication If the GOOSE GSSE functional...

Page 197: ...and values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional con straint of the MMXU logical node as per the IEC 61850 standard According to IEC 61850 7 3 the db value shall rep...

Page 198: ... to control the T60 virtual inputs The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4 When this value is changed the T60 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re instantiated and contain ...

Page 199: ...not all values can be stored Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points associated ...

Page 200: ...o a value from the list of IEC 61850 data attributes supported by the T60 Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the T60 is restarted It is recommended to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some but not all data from already existing GGIO1 GGIO4 and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset REPORT 1 DATASET IT...

Page 201: ... can result in very large OpCnt values over time This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1 XCBR CONFIGURATION XCBR1 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 SYNCCHECK CLS O...

Page 202: ...lete details on these control models The XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting is used to select SBO timeout value To be successful the IEC 61850 operate com mand must be executed after the select command within the XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting value The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETU...

Page 203: ...TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols n TFTP PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP can be used to transfer files from the T60 over a network The T60 operates as a TFTP server TFTP client software is available from various sources including Microsoft Windows NT The dir txt file obtained from...

Page 204: ...e threshold values from the default for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point Whenever power is removed and re applied to the T60 the default thresholds are in effect The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not If redundancy is set to Yes two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time IEC TCP PORT NUMBER When set to 0 the change takes e...

Page 205: ...ocols used for the real time transfer of data for display and control purposes The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges and other devices can be configured to consume EGD data exchanges The number of produced exchanges up to three the data items in each exchange up to 50 and the exchange production rate can be configured EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR series relays...

Page 206: ...EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to 1000 ms FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION EXCH 1 FUNCTION Disable Range Disable Enable MESSAGE EXCH 1 DESTINATION 0 0 0 0 Range standard IP address MESSAGE EXCH 1 DATA RATE 1000 ms Range 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 Modbus register address ran...

Page 207: ...The IEC 60870 5 103 protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL set ting is set to IEC 60870 5 103 IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU This setting uniquely defines this T60 on the serial line Select an ID between 0 and 254 This ID does not need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller but it is recom mended Note that RS485 only allows...

Page 208: ...nse to a general interrogation received from the controller or reported spontaneously Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests If the T60 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time it demands access for Class 1 data transmission ACD 1 in the con trol field of the response For any change to take effect restart the relay PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC...

Page 209: ...SAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 FACTOR 1 000 Range 0 000 to 65 535 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 OFFSET 0 Range 32768 to 32767 in steps of 1 ASDU 4 ASDU 4 TYP 9 Range 3 or 9 MESSAGE ASDU 4 FUN 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 INF 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT 0 Range 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 ANALOG 1 Off Range FlexAnalog parameter MESSAGE ASD...

Page 210: ... can configure only one measurand for each ASDU but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU2 and configure measurands in ASDU3 For any change to take effect restart the relay ANALOG FACTOR AND OFFSET For each measurand included in the ASDU a factor and offset can also be configured The factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands The final measurement sent to the IEC60870 103 mas...

Page 211: ... table The ON and OFF for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type FUN and information number INF If the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command the relay rejects it IEC103 COMMANDS COMMAND 0 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE COMMAND 1 Range see sub...

Page 212: ... historical data such as event records and oscillography When the relay restarts the RTC initializes from an onboard battery backed clock which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch approximately 1 minute per month 23 ppm Once the RTC is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol PTP IRIG B or SNTP its accuracy approaches that of the synchroniz ing time delivered to the relay While the R...

Page 213: ... received through any of the active protocols the UR clock updates However given that IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 60870 5 104 Modbus and DNP are low accuracy time synchronization methods avoid their use for synchronization when better accuracy time protocols such as IRIG B and PTP are active in the system See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu section of this manual to manually set the RTC The REAL TIME ...

Page 214: ...he grandmaster role Should a clock on starting up discover it is better that the present grandmaster it assumes the grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave The T60 qualification mechanism accepts a potential mas ter clock as a new grandmaster when in a four second interval it has received three announce messages from it all better than the present grandmaster clock and bette...

Page 215: ...e relay s real time clock This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays not compensated for in the network In a fully compliant PP network the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay In such networks this setting should be zero In networks containing one or more switches and or clocks that do not im...

Page 216: ...TION to Enabled The T60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet The T60 waits up to 18 minutes 1024 seconds without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self test error The SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is 123 for normal SNTP operation If SNTP is not required close the port by setting it to 0 When the SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is set to 0 the c...

Page 217: ...MMABLE FAULT REPORT USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1 2 When enabled this function monitors the pre fault trigger The pre fault data are stored in the memory for prospective cre ation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre fault trigger The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the pre fault trigger is asserted but not shorter than 1 second When the fault trigger occurs the faul...

Page 218: ...RT 1 1 to FAULT REPORT 1 32 These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude true RMS phase angle frequency temperature etc to be stored should the report be created Up to 32 channels can be configured Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest 5 2 8 OSCILLOGRAPHY a MAIN MENU PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY Oscill...

Page 219: ...as no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device When changes are made to the oscillography settings all existing oscillography records are cleared b DIGITAL CHANNELS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS A DIGITAL 1 63 CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the ...

Page 220: ... will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed All eight CT VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file The CT VT module channels are named as follows slot_letter terminal_number I or V phase A B or C or 4th input The fourth current input in a bank is called IG and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX For example F2 IB desig nates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the ...

Page 221: ...g DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE Continuous Range Continuous Trigger MESSAGE DATA LOGGER TRIGGER Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DATA LOGGER RATE 60000 ms Range 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 2 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A Flex...

Page 222: ...tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display It can be quite time consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed DATA LOGGER CONFIG This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off...

Page 223: ...s Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of each pulse Assign a FlexLogic operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new demand interval pulses If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is Block Interval use cal culating method 2 If a trigger is assigned the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minutes ...

Page 224: ...age can be interrupted at any time 3 All the LEDs are turned on One LED at a time turns off for 1 second then back on The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point This stage can be interrupted at any time When testing is in progress ...

Page 225: ...y start stage 2 At this point forward test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2 Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures This is to be performed via user programmable pushbutton 1 After applying the settings in application example 1 hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs Nex...

Page 226: ...n on the location of these indexed LEDs The user programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Self Reset the default setting the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Latched the LED once lit remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button from a remote device via a communica...

Page 227: ...SER 2 and USER 3 on the standard and enhanced front panels These are user programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test switching setting groups and invoking and scrolling though user programmable displays USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION Enabled Range Disabled Enabled Valid for units equipped with Direct Input Output module MESSAGE DIR...

Page 228: ... be configured appropriately to perform the desired function The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs An event is logged in the event record as per user setting when a c...

Page 229: ...TTON LOGIC 842010A2 CDR CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 2 BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL SETTING SETTINGS TIMER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Enabled 1 Enabled 1 When applicable Enabled 1 RUN OFF ON AND 100 msec 0 CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON ...

Page 230: ...rately update the EnerVista software under Maintenance Enable Pushbutton USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Self Reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT USER PB 1 Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 HOLD 0 0 s Range 0 0...

Page 231: ... be set activated by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSH BTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton The state of each pushbutton is stored in non volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power The pushbutton is reset deactivated in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set ting or by directly pressing the a...

Page 232: ... the bottom 20 character line of the user programmable pushbutton message and displays when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched A message does not display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be Off upon its release The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH ME...

Page 233: ...button is activated While activated target and other messages are suppressed To allow front panel keypad operation when a keypad button is pressed the message is supressed for 10 seconds PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS If this setting is enabled each user programmable pushbutton state change is logged as an event into the event recorder The figures show the user programmable pushbutton logic Figure 5 16 USER ...

Page 234: ...G any FlexLogic operand PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL AND SETTING FLASH MESSAGE TIME TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON LATCHED LATCHED SELF RESET AND From user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF SETTING TRST 0 Instantaneous reset OFF MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS XXXXXXXXXX PUSHBTN ID TEXT XXXXXXXXXX PUSHBTN OFF TEXT The message is temporarily remo...

Page 235: ...display note that only the programmed screens are displayed The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys The display disappears after the default message time out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPER TIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting USER PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT The user definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting Any FlexLogic operand in partic...

Page 236: ...l through the characters A space is selected like a character 4 Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position 5 Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed 6 The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information 7 Press the ENTER key to store the new settings To enter a numerical value for any of the five items the ...

Page 237: ...hows decimal form of user selected Modbus register address corresponding to second tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 3 0 This item is not being used There is no corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 4 0 This item is not being used There is no corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 5 0 This item is not being used There is no correspondin...

Page 238: ...g FlexLogic operands 1 DIRECT RING BREAK direct input output ring break This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR series relay are not being received back by the relay 2 DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF direct device offline These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct output messages from at least one direct device are not being received Direct input ...

Page 239: ...D OUTPUT DATA RATES MODULE CHANNEL SUPPORTED DATA RATES 74 Channel 1 64 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 7L Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7M Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7P Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7T Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps 7W Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7V Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps...

Page 240: ...D 1 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps For UR series IED 2 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps The message delivery time is about 0 2 of power cycle in both ways at 128 kbps that is from device 1 to device 2 and from device 2 to device 1 Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this bac...

Page 241: ...oth rings are healthy IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 4 0 4 of power system cycle IED 3 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken say TX2 RX2 the delivery times are as follows IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of p...

Page 242: ...CT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes For UR series IED 3 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 3 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes In this configuration the following delivery times are expected at 128 kbps IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 5 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of ...

Page 243: ...RM 1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O CRC ALARM CH1 2 The T60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32 bit CRC The CRC alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check The monitoring function counts all incoming messages including messages that failed the CRC check A separate...

Page 244: ...Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10 4 c UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM 1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 The T60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages In the ring configuration all messages originating ...

Page 245: ... OF TERMINALS is 3 three terminal system set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2 For a two terminal system the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 redundant channels LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER In installa tions that use multiplexers or modems it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays T...

Page 246: ...elay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to Programmed This setting is defaulted to Not Programmed when at the factory The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the Programmed state The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay This name will appear on generated reports INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed Range Not Programmed Prog...

Page 247: ...nd consists of the following steps Configure the field units This establishes the point to point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module and a specific digital core on a specific Brick This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay Configure the AC banks This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages AC bank co...

Page 248: ... CT primary rating must be entered To detect low level ground fault currents the sensitive ground input can be used In this case the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections Enter the rated CT primary current values For both 1000 5 and 1000 1 CTs the entry would be 1000 For correct opera tion the CT secondary rating must match the set...

Page 249: ...ECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary For example on a system with a 13 8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400 120 volt VT in a delta connec tion the secondary voltage would be 115 that is 13800 14400 120 For a wye connection the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 ...

Page 250: ...rke transformation of the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking for better performance dur ing fault open pole and VT and CT fail conditions The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay Phase angle of the reference signal always displays ze...

Page 251: ...in the relevant settings menu The internal design of the ele ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude such as phase time overcurrent two settings are provided One setting specifies the source the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS AC input actual values...

Page 252: ...m The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application and the CT VT inputs that are used to provide the data INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER CT VT MODULE 1 CT VT MODULE 2 CT VT MODULE 3 CTs VTs not applicable 827092A3 CDR SOURCE 1 CURRENT PHASOR PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRE...

Page 253: ... HV AUX SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 Phase CT M1 F1 F5 None Ground CT M1 None None Phase VT M5 None None Aux VT None None U1 TRANSFORMER GENERAL See page 5 108 MESSAGE WINDING 1 See page 5 110 MESSAGE WINDING 2 See page 5 110 MESSAGE WINDING 3 See page 5 110 827794A1 CDR F 5 F 1 DSP Bank U 1 M 1 M 1 M 5 51BF 1 51BF 2 Source 4 87T 51P UR Relay A V V A W W Var Var Amps Source 1 Source 3 Volts Amps Amps Volts A...

Page 254: ...to External with CTs the transformer phase shift is externally compensated by the CT connections LOAD LOSS AT RATED LOAD This setting should be taken from the transformer nameplate If not available from the nameplate the setting value can be computed as where is the winding rated current and R is the three phase series resistance The setting is used as an input for the calculation of the hottest s...

Page 255: ... Forced Cooled as named TOP OIL RISE OVER AMBIENT This setting should be available from the transformer nameplate data THERMAL CAPACITY The setting should be available from the transformer nameplate data If not refer to the follow ing calculations For the OA and FA cooling types C 0 06 core and coil assembly in lbs 0 04 tank and fittings in lbs 1 33 gallons of oil Wh C or C 0 0272 core and coil as...

Page 256: ...owing example of a delta wye Δ Y connected power transformer with the following data The abbreviated nomenclature for applicable relay settings is as follows Rotation SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM PHASE ROTATION wtotal SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL NUMBER OF WINDINGS Compensation SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL PHASE COMPENSATION Source w SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORME...

Page 257: ...ram on the nameplate with the winding terminals clearly labeled This standard specifically states that the phase relationships are established for a condi tion where the source phase sequence of 1 2 3 is connected to transformer windings labeled 1 2 and 3 respectively IEC standard 60076 1 1993 states that the terminal markings of the three phases follow national practice The phase rela tionship am...

Page 258: ...ore not recommended All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A B and C terminals to the power system phases A B and C respectively The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system phase sequence of ABC in accordance with the standards for power transformers Users with a system phase sequence of ACB must determine the transformer type f...

Page 259: ... the lowest CT margin In our example the reference winding is chosen as follows 1 Calculate the rated current for windings 1 and 2 EQ 5 11 2 With these rated currents calculate the CT margin for windings 1 and 2 EQ 5 12 3 Since the reference winding wref is winding 2 The reference winding is shown in ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT REFERENCE WINDING The unit for calcu...

Page 260: ... allow zero sequence current flow in that winding and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary The T60 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically based on the settings entered for the transformer All CTs are connected Wye polarity markings pointing away from the transformer All currents are phase and zero sequence compensated i...

Page 261: ...w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IB p w 2 3 IA w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IC p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IA p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IB p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IA w IC p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IA p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IB p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IA w IC p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IA p w IB w IB p w IC w IC p w IA w IA p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IB p w 2 3 IC w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IC p w 2 3 IA w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IA p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IA w...

Page 262: ...one Grounding w Within zone IA p w IC w IB p w IA w IC p w IB w IA p w 2 3 IC w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IB p w 2 3 IA w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IC p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IA p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IB w IB p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IC p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IA w IA p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IB w IB p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IC p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IA w IA p w IB w IB p w IC w IC p w IA w IA p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IB p w 2 3 IC ...

Page 263: ...his approach is preferred because it provides increased sensitivity as the current from each individual set of CTs partici pates directly in the calculation of CT ratio mismatch phase compensation zero sequence removal if required and the differential restraint current The concept used in this approach is to consider that each set of CTs connected to winding 1 represents a connection to an individ...

Page 264: ...set tings menu WINDING 1 SOURCE WDG 1X WINDING 2 SOURCE WDG 1Y WINDING 3 SOURCE WDG 2 SETUP METHOD B ALTERNATE This approach adds the current from each phase of the CT1 and CT2 together to represent the total winding 1 current The procedure is shown below 1 Enter the settings for each set of CTs in the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK settings menu as shown for Method A above 2 Configure Source...

Page 265: ...h of the year if a directly measured device output is not available see monthly settings below TOP OIL TEMPERATURE Select RTD DCmA or remote RTD input for direct measurement of top oil temperature If an RTD or DCmA input is not available select Computed The following menu will be available when AMBIENT TEMPERATURE is Monthly Average PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER THERMAL INPUTS AMBIENT TEM...

Page 266: ...SE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P CLSD Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 07...

Page 267: ...and used to track the breaker open or closed position If the mode is selected as 1 Pole the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C respectively BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that should be a normally closed 52 b status input to create a logic 1 when the brea...

Page 268: ...ETTING Enabled BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL USER 2 OFF ON To close BRK1 Name SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE SETTING MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C To breaker control logic sheet...

Page 269: ...AND BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN BREAKER 1 INTERM ΦA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS SETTING 3 Pole 1 Pole BREAKER 1 MODE SETTING Off BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM SETTING Off BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV AND OR OR SETTING BR...

Page 270: ...s and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element SWITCH 1 NAME Assign a user defined name up to six characters to the disconnect switch This name will be used in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SWITCH 1 NAME SW 1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SWITCH 1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAG...

Page 271: ...ack phases B and C respectively SWTCH 1 ΦA 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that is for a normally closed 89 b status input that creates a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open If a separate 89 b contact input is not available then an inverted 89 a status signal can be used SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED If the mode is selected as three pole this setting has no function If ...

Page 272: ...TCH 1 ΦB INTERM FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SWITCH 1 Φ BAD ST C SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM 859713A1 CDR SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY 0 SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN SETTING Off SWITCH 1 OPEN SETTING Disabled Enabled SWITCH 1 FUNCTION AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD OR OR AND AND ...

Page 273: ... 00 to 0 98 and 1 03 to 20 00 This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points To enter a custom FlexCurve enter the reset and operate times using the VALUE keys for each selected pickup point using the MESSAGE UP DOWN keys for the desired protection curve A B C or D FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0 00 xPKP 0 ms Range 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Table ...

Page 274: ...ith a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples There are 41 recloser curve types supported These definite oper ating times are useful to coordinate operating times typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro tective devices have different operating characteristics The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize...

Page 275: ...0 ms see below Figure 5 34 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup Figure 5 35 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed If this is attempted the EnerVista UR Setup software ge...

Page 276: ...SER CURVES GE113 GE120 GE138 AND GE142 GE104 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE101 GE102 GE103 GE106 GE105 842723A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE113 GE142 GE138 GE120 842725A1 CDR ...

Page 277: ... AND GE201 Figure 5 39 RECLOSER CURVES GE131 GE141 GE152 AND GE200 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE134 GE151 GE140 GE137 GE201 842730A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE131 GE200 GE152 GE141 842728A1 CDR ...

Page 278: ...ES GE116 GE117 GE118 GE132 GE136 AND GE139 842729A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE133 GE163 GE162 GE161 GE165 GE164 842726A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE116 GE132 GE118 GE117 GE139 GE136 ...

Page 279: ...2 Figure 5 43 RECLOSER CURVES GE119 GE135 AND GE202 842724A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE121 GE114 GE112 GE122 GE107 GE115 GE111 842727A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE119 GE202 GE135 ...

Page 280: ...N UR Implementation of IEC 61850 90 5 Synchrophasor data as measured and calculated by phasor measurement units PMUs is used to assess the condition of the electrical power network The IEEE C37 118 standards define synchrophasors and related message formats to transmit synchrophasor data Synchrophasor streaming via IEEE C37 118 has proven to work but the desire to have a communica tion mechanism t...

Page 281: ...IRIG B receiver must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values Depending on the applied filter the Synchrophasors that are produced by PMUs are classified as either P protection or M Measurement class Synchrophasors Synchrophasors available within the UR that have no filtering applied are classified as NONE which within the standard is classified as PRES OR UNKN...

Page 282: ...us indication points aggregated as a 16 bit bitstring and 16 analog points The Analog GGIO values are selectable from any FlexAnalog value in the UR For version 7 0 and later the description fields for the phasors analog and digital channels are populated with the 16 character name field provided within the Basic Configuration menu Additionally the names of the 16 binary points are implemented as ...

Page 283: ...regator datset s For version 7 0 and later only FCDA data is supported Figure 5 47 DATA SET CREATED FROM USER SELECTED INTERNAL ITEMS EXAMPLE THE CREATION OF DIFFERENT DATA SETS The aggregators allow the aggregation of phasors from multiple PMUs with the same reporting rate into a single custom data set to optimize bandwidth when streaming Figure 5 48 EXAMPLE OF AGGREGATOR DATA SETS ...

Page 284: ...5 DATA SETS In the CFG 2 file all relevant information about the data being streamed is included However this file does not include the fact that it describes a 90 5 dataset or the number of Application Service Data Units datasets In order to communicate this information via the CFG 2 file for a given aggregator when the aggregator is set to 90 5 the version number of the CFG 2 file found in bits ...

Page 285: ... 1 STYLE Polar Range Polar Rectangular MESSAGE PMU 1 RATE 10 sec Range 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 5 sec 10 sec 12 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 50 sec 60 sec 100 sec 120 sec MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 Off Range Available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 Off Range Available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 NAME GE UR PMU PHS 1 Range 16 character ASCII string MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 NAME GE UR PMU P...

Page 286: ...t out or recorded When one source is selected by one PMU it cannot be selected by another PMU PMU 1 CLASS Range P M None This setting selects the synchrophasor class Note that a reporting rate of 100 or 120 can only be selected for class P synchrophasors and if the system frequency is 50 or 60 Hz respectively PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 1...

Page 287: ...ncurrently with the synchrophasor instant These values are mapped into a two byte integer number with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16 PMU1 D CH 1 NM to PMU1 D CH 16 NM These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels Sixteen character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame PMU1 D ...

Page 288: ...espectively as specified in the IEC 61850 standard IEC 61850 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT BASIC CONFIGURATION PMU1 PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURA TION 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION PMU1 LDINST A user defined visible string maximum 64 char ASCII test to assign Logical Device LD Inst for a PMU LD As per IEC 61850 6 standard specification the PMU LD Name is the concatenate...

Page 289: ...steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION MAG 100 0 Range 95 0 to 105 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION MAG 100 0 Range 95 0 to 105 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE P...

Page 290: ...ontrol purposes without applying this correction 4 When connected to line to line voltages the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6 PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE This setting allows correcting positive and negative sequence currents for vector groups of power transforme...

Page 291: ...eds to be implemented using FlexLogic e USER TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles f FREQUENCY TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 FREQUENCY...

Page 292: ... as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 51 FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC g VOLTAGE TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW VOLT 0 800 pu Range 0 250 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH ...

Page 293: ... using the recorder in the forced mode recording as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 52 VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC h CURRENT TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER This element responds to elevated current The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement unit PMU source All current channel A ...

Page 294: ...r 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current or the product of nominal secondary voltage the VT ratio and the nominal primary current For the three phase power 1 pu is three times that for a single phase power The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 00...

Page 295: ...GGER PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PKP TIME 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIME 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of ...

Page 296: ...n positive df dt The comparator applies a 4 hysteresis PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the fall ing direction negative df dt The comparator applies a 4 hysteresis PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PKP TIME This setting can be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO ...

Page 297: ... ROCOF df dt SETTINGS PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL df dt RAISE OR df dt FALL RUN SETTINGS PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIME 0 t DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER Off 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame 847012A1 CDR AND OR...

Page 298: ...mount of pre trigger data as a percent of the entire record This setting applies only to the timed mode of recording l AGGREGATORS PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU AGGREGATOR 1 When the protocol selection is set via the software or keypad all aggregators whose protocol is not set to None are set to the last protocol saved that is IEEE C37 118 or IEC 61850 90 5 to any aggregat...

Page 299: ...OR1 PDC CONTROL The synchrophasor standard allows for user defined controls originating at the PDC to be executed on the PMU The control is accomplished via an extended command frame The relay decodes the first word of the extended field EXTFRAME to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands Each aggregator supports 16 FlexLogic operands as shown in the table The operands are asserted for 5 seconds fol...

Page 300: ...or data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as received via the network as above AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 2 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as received via the network as above AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 3 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as received via the network as above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 16 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network Table 5 18 NUMBER OF ...

Page 301: ...uration revision every time the configuration is changed This setting allows the user to reset the configuration back to 1 or a value from 1 to 4294967295 MSVCB 1 PRIORITY A value from 0 through 7 The default value is 4 MSVCB 1 IP Class The value represents the IPv4 Differentiated Services formerly called TypeOfService value The default value is set for Expedited Forwarding 101110B 46 or 2EH This ...

Page 302: ...5 156 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 5 4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS 5 1 yes no 2 yes yes ENUMERATION AUTHENTICATION ENCRYPTION ...

Page 303: ...applies to the other features that set flags elements virtual inputs remote inputs schemes and human operators If more complex logic than presented above is required it is implemented via FlexLogic For example if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element the two cont...

Page 304: ...nt Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input external contact closed Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input external contact open Contact Output type Form A contact only Contact Closed Cont Op 1 Closed Contact output is closed Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact Voltage Off Cont Op 1...

Page 305: ...ations only ELEMENT Auxiliary overvoltage AUX OV1 PKP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 OP Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated AUX OV2 to 3 Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1 ELEMENT Auxiliary undervoltage AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up Auxiliary undervoltage e...

Page 306: ...52 a and 52 b contacts Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Breaker 1 phase C is closed Breaker 1 phase C is open Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole Breaker 1 is closed Breaker 1 is open Breaker 1 has discrepancy Breaker 1 trouble alarm Breaker 1 manual close Breaker 1 trip phase A command Breaker 1 trip phase B command Breaker 1 trip ...

Page 307: ... DPO Load encroachment has picked up Load encroachment has operated Load encroachment has dropped out ELEMENT Neutral instantaneous overcurrent NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 OP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out NEUTRAL IOC2 to Same set of operands as shown for NEUTR...

Page 308: ... PHASE OV1 DPO B PHASE OV1 DPO C At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated Phase C of overvoltage 1 has o...

Page 309: ...ND FT2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for RESTD GND FT1 ELEMENT Remote RTD protection RRTD COMM FAIL RRTD RTD 1 ALARM DPO RRTD RTD 1 ALARM OP RRTD RTD 1 ALARM PKP RRTD RTD 1 OPEN RRTD RTD 1 SHORTED RRTD RTD 1 TRIP DPO RRTD RTD 1 TRIP OP RRTD RTD 1 TRIP PKP Asserted when RRTD loss of communications is detected Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage drops out Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm...

Page 310: ...itch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole SWITCH 2 to 24 Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1 ELEMENT Synchrocheck SYNC1 DEAD S OP SYNC1 DEAD S DPO SYNC1 SYNC OP SYNC1 SYNC DPO SYNC1 CLS OP SYNC1 CLS DPO SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX Synchrocheck 1...

Page 311: ...he 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase A The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase B The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase C The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase A The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase B The 5th harmonic of transformer perc...

Page 312: ...t finished LED INDICATORS User programmable LEDs LED USER 1 Asserted when user programmable LED 1 is on LED USER 2 to 48 The operand above is available for user programmable LEDs 2 through 48 PASSWORD SECURITY ACCESS LOC SETG OFF ACCESS LOC SETG ON ACCESS LOC CMND OFF ACCESS LOC CMND ON ACCESS REM SETG OFF ACCESS REM SETG ON ACCESS REM CMND OFF ACCESS REM CMND ON UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when ...

Page 313: ... for a connection that is not in a ring The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code A FlexLogic equation is incorrect Bad IRIG B Signal self test See Chapter 7 Commands and Targets A difference is detected between the desired and actual latch contact state A subset of the minor self test errors generated see Chapter 7 Link failure detected See description in Chapter 7 Command...

Page 314: ... an equation list End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters One shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input The output from a one shot is True positive for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation There is ...

Page 315: ...16 17 through 25 to AND 9 and the outputs from these two gates to AND 2 Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator If so the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output For the example shown above the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR 1...

Page 316: ...er to start at the out put end of the equation and work back towards the input as shown in the following steps It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top For demonstration the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99 and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn Until accustomed to using FlexLogic it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of...

Page 317: ...e set of parame ters into a logic diagram The result of this process is shown below which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 dia gram as a check Figure 5 63 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6 Repeating the process described for virtual output 3 select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4 99 The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter Virt Op 4...

Page 318: ...cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic this may be difficult to achieve but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service In the following equation virtual out...

Page 319: ...OGIC EQUATION EDITOR PATH SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR There are 512 FlexLogic entries available numbered from 1 to 512 with default END entry settings If a Disabled Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry the associated state flag will never be set to 1 The key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types 5 5 6 FLE...

Page 320: ... FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME FxE1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE Signed Range Signed Absolute MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE Level Range Level De...

Page 321: ...s setting is set to Absolute Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions monitoring power regardless of its direction or monitoring a trend The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 IN FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if...

Page 322: ...ction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac teristics as shown in the figure below FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Under PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP 842705A1 CDR ...

Page 323: ...he relay The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per unit values using the following definitions of the base units Table 5 23 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS Brk X Acc Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 1 kA2 cycle DCmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN in...

Page 324: ...SE 1 SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK Max Delta Volts VBASE maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the IN and IN inputs VOLTS PER HERTZ BASE 1 00 pu XFMR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT Xfmr Iad Ibd and Icd Mag IBASE maximum primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs CT primary for source currents and transformer reference primary cur...

Page 325: ...rted the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1 Figure 5 68 NON VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE N 1 to 16 AND LOGIC LATCH 1 LATCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LATCH 1 TYPE Reset Dominant Range Reset Dominant Set Dominant MESSAGE LATCH 1 SET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latch...

Page 326: ...chapter See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chap ter 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 Each of the six setting group menus is identical Setting group 1 the default active group automatically becomes active if no other group is active see the Control elements section for additional details If the device incorrectly switches to gr...

Page 327: ... the VT is entered correctly under the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close in reverse three phase faults For this purpose the maxi mum fault clearing time breaker fail time in the substation should be considered On the other hand the MEMORY DURA TION cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditio...

Page 328: ...d permanently but for a limited time only the self polarization may be applied permanently and therefore should take higher priority In firmware 7 20 when the fast distance algorithm is applied the HardFiber brick is not supported The fast dis tance algorithm is supported by the T60 It is not supported by the HardFiber which maintains the original distance element timing Figure 5 69 MEMORY VOLTAGE...

Page 329: ...E setting common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 ohms Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30...

Page 330: ...tion of associated mem ory action PHS DIST Z1 DIR All phase distance zones are reversible The forward direction is defined by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180 from that angle The non directional zone spans between the for ward reach impedance defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings and the reverse reach imped ance defined by PHS DIST Z1...

Page 331: ...RECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC Figure 5 72 DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837802A1 CDR X R RCA COMP LIMIT R E V R E A C H R E A C H REV REACH RCA 837721A1 CDR X R RE AC H RCA DIR RCA DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD ...

Page 332: ...3A1 CDR X R R E AC H RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD R E V R E AC H REV REACH RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT 837722A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 60o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o ...

Page 333: ...ing shall be set to Yd1 The zone is restricted by the potential point location of the VTs as illustrated in Figure e PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone In section a of the following figure zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding Ther...

Page 334: ... an angle of reach impedance as shown in the distance characteristic figures shown earlier This setting is independent from PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non directional PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting The value must be entered in secondary ohms This setting does not ...

Page 335: ...the quadrilateral characteristic see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures PHS DIST Z1 SUPV The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line to line current fault loop current used for the distance calculations For convenience is accommodated by the pickup that is before being used the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by If the minimum fault c...

Page 336: ...IST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTING PH DIST Z1 DELAY TPKP 0 TPKP 0 TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR AND OR 837036A1 CDR from the open pole element D60 L60 and L90 only FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OP...

Page 337: ...G Off 0 PH DIST Z1 BLK SETTING IA IB IB IC DISTANCE SOURCE IC IA VAG VBG VBG VCG VCG VAG VAB VBC VCA V_1 I_1 Wye VTs Delta VTs SETTINGS PH DIST Z1 DIR RUN A B ELEMENT RUN B C ELEMENT RUN C A ELEMENT PH DIST Z1 SHAPE PH DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 REACH PH DIST Z1 RCA PH DIST Z1 REV REACH PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BL...

Page 338: ... 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 Ω Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT Zero seq Range Zero seq Neg seq MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 NON HOMOGEN ANG 0 0 Range 40 0 to 40 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT 90 Range 30 to 90 in s...

Page 339: ...e zone is configured individually through its own setting menu All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except 1 The SIGNAL SOURCE setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entere...

Page 340: ...edance required for zero sequence compensation of the ground distance elements The entered value is the zero sequence impedance angle minus the positive sequence impedance angle This setting is available on a per zone basis enabling precise values for tapped non homologous and series compensated lines GND DIST Z1 ZOM Z1 MAG The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for t...

Page 341: ...nce quantities Refer to chapters 8 for additional information GND DIST Z1 REV REACH This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non directional GND DIST Z1 DIR setting The value must be entered in secondary ohms This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if th...

Page 342: ...ised by the magnitude of the neutral 3I_0 current The current supervision pickup should be set less than the minimum 3I_0 current for the end of the zone fault taking into account the desired fault resistance coverage to prevent maloperation due to VT fuse failure Settings less than 0 2 pu are not recommended and should be applied with caution To enhance ground distance security against spuri ous ...

Page 343: ...KP A GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTING GND DIST Z1 DELAY TPKP 0 TPKP 0 TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z1 PKP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 OP A GND DIST Z1 OP B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 OP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z1 OP OR AND OR 837037A1 CDR from the open pole detector element D60 L60 and L90 only FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC ...

Page 344: ...ERAND OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z3 PKP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z3 PKP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z3 PKP C TIMER 0 ms 20 ms TIMER 0 ms 20 ms TIMER 0 ms 20 ms SETTING GND DIST Z3 DELAY TPKP 0 SETTING GND DIST Z3 DELAY TPKP 0 SETTING GND DIST Z3 DELAY TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z3 OP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z3 OP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z3 OP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Page 345: ...T Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA TIMER 1 cycle 1 cycle SETTING GND DIST Z1 SUPV RUN IN 0 05 I_1 Pickup FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 DPO A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 DPO B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 DPO C FLEXLOGIC OPER...

Page 346: ...lt decision can be reliably made 837011AM CDR AND AND AND OR Quadrilateral characteristic only AND OR MEMORY V_1 0 80 pu I_1 0 025 pu SETTING Enabled 1 GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION SETTING Off 0 GND DIST Z2 BLK SETTING IA IB DISTANCE SOURCE IC VAG VBG VCG V_1 I_1 Wye VTs SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 ZOM Z1 ANG RUN A ELEMENT RUN B ELEMENT RUN C ELEMENT GND DIST Z2 POL CURRENT GND DIST Z2 NON HOMGEN ANG GND DIST Z2...

Page 347: ...n steps of 0 001 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD REACH 50 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID 60 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT 70 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD RCA 75 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE POWER SWING REV REACH 50 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohm...

Page 348: ...100 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD 100 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD 100 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD 100 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD 100 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 ME...

Page 349: ...ation The out of step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the imped ance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays ...

Page 350: ...5 Figure 5 89 POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Figure 5 90 EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS OUTER M I D D L E I N N E R R E V R C A F W D R C A RE V RE AC H INNER LIM IT ANGLE MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE OUTER LIMIT ANGLE 827843A2 CDR FW D RE AC H R X 842734A1 CDR ...

Page 351: ...ditions The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus the locus enters the inner characteristic The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus the locus leaving the outer characteristic This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre defined number of ...

Page 352: ...rac teristic The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho POWER SWING FWD RCA This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteris tics angles of all the blinders and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics POWER SWING REV REACH This set...

Page 353: ...AY 2 Controls the out of step tripping function in the three step mode only This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out of step tripping sequence is completed This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest...

Page 354: ...REGION INNER IMPEDANCE REGION RUN RUN RUN RUN POWER SWING REV REACH POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD POWER SWING SHAPE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD POWER SWING FWD REACH POWER SWING SUPV POWER SWING REV RCA POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD POWER SWING FWD RCA POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD POWER SWING FUN...

Page 355: ...ER SWING SOURCE I_0 I_1 I_2 I_0 I_0 K_0 SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION Enabled 1 I_1 I_1 K_1 I_2 I_2 K_2 RUN OR I_0 I_1 I_2 present values I_0 I_1 I_2 half a cycle old values K_0 K_2 three times the average change over last power cycle K_1 four times the average change over last power cycle AND 0 4 cycles TIMER 0 10 cycles TIMER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD ...

Page 356: ... SWING SEAL IN DELAY POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP POWER SWING BLK Off 0 POWER SWING TRIP MODE POWER SWING MODE POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING UN BLOCK POWER SWING 50DD POWER ...

Page 357: ... distance element LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT 0 250 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH 1 00 Ω Range 0 02 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE 30 Range 5 to 50 in step...

Page 358: ...the element as shown in the Load encroachment characteristic diagram This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the pos itive sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the p...

Page 359: ... factor and loss of life The computation of these elements fol lows IEEE standards C57 91 1995 IEEE Guide for Loading Mineral Oil Immersed Transformers and C57 96 1989 IEEE Guide for Loading Dry Type Distribution Transformers The computations are based on transformer loading conditions ambient temperature and the entered transformer data TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL See page 5 214 MESSAGE INST...

Page 360: ...breakpoint 2 settings PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP 0 100 pu Range 0 050 to 1 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 1 25 Range 15 to 100 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 1 2 000 pu Range 1 000 to 2 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 2 8 000 pu Rang...

Page 361: ...current unbalance between primary and secondary windings and can be caused by the following 1 Inherent CT inaccuracies 2 Onload tap changer operation it adjusts the transformer ratio and consequently the winding currents 3 CT saturation Winding 1 current waveform Winding 2 current waveform Winding n current waveform Magnitude phase angle and zero sequence compensation as required Magnitude phase a...

Page 362: ...dual magnetism The latter may be as high as 80 of the nominal flux effectively reducing the CT capabilities by the factor of 5 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 2 The slope 2 setting ensures stability during heavy through fault conditions where CT saturation results in high differential current Slope 2 should be set high to cater for the worst case where one set of CTs saturates but the other set doesn t...

Page 363: ... inhibited from operating The value of the INRUSH INHIBIT MODE setting must be taken into account when programming this value The INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL is typically set to 20 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT MODE An overexcitation condition resulting from an increased volts hertz ratio poses a danger to the protected transformer hence the volts hertz protection A given transformer can however tolerate an ove...

Page 364: ...F OP A XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP A XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP B XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP C XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND A XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH A XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND B XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH B XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND C XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH C XFMR PCNT DIFF OP XFMR PCNT DIFF OP B XFMR PCNT DIFF OP C INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION INRUSH INHIBIT MODE OVEREXC ITN INHIBIT LEVEL OVEREXC ITN INHIBIT FUNCTION PERCENT DIFF BLOCK Disabled Disabled 0 Off 0 En...

Page 365: ...T TEMPERATURE INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL INST DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE INST DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP 8 000 pu Range 2 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE INST DIFF BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE INST DIFFERENTIAL TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE INST DIFFERENTIAL EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled HOTTEST SPOT TEMPERA...

Page 366: ...he Aging Factor element detects transformer aging in per unit normal insulation aging The element can be set for alarm or trip whenever the computed aging factor is greater than the user defined pickup setting for the specified time delay AGING FACTOR PICKUP Enter a value above which the aging factor element will operate Enter a setting greater than the maximum permissible aging factor under emerg...

Page 367: ...nt is enabled the computed loss of life will be added to the initial loss of life LOSS OF LIFE PICKUP Enter the expended life in hours required for operation of the element This setting should be above the total transformer life set as a reference based on nominal loading conditions and a 30 C ambient temper ature as outlined in the IEEE standards LOSS OF LIFE LOSS OF LIFE FUNCTION Disabled Range ...

Page 368: ...ENTS 5 SETTINGS 5 Figure 5 104 TRANSFORMER LOSS OF LIFE LOGIC SETTING SETTING ACTUAL VALUE SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS XFMR LIFE LOST LOSS OF LIFE FUNCTION LOSS OF LIFE BLOCK LOL PKP RUN LOSS OF LIFE PICKUP LOSS OF LIFE OP LOSS OF LIFE PKP Enable 1 Off 0 828732A3 cdr AND ...

Page 369: ... to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable When this variable indi cates that the energy capacity has reached 100 a time overcurrent element will operate If less than 100 energy capac ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold...

Page 370: ...87 8 007 5 187 3 710 2 837 2 277 1 897 1 626 6 0 136 090 57 130 21 880 12 010 7 780 5 564 4 255 3 416 2 845 2 439 8 0 181 454 76 174 29 174 16 014 10 374 7 419 5 674 4 555 3 794 3 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE VERY INVERSE 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 736 0 68...

Page 371: ...0 4 280 3 837 3 528 3 297 3 116 2 971 IEC CURVE B 0 05 1 350 0 675 0 338 0 225 0 169 0 135 0 113 0 096 0 084 0 075 0 10 2 700 1 350 0 675 0 450 0 338 0 270 0 225 0 193 0 169 0 150 0 20 5 400 2 700 1 350 0 900 0 675 0 540 0 450 0 386 0 338 0 300 0 40 10 800 5 400 2 700 1 800 1 350 1 080 0 900 0 771 0 675 0 600 0 60 16 200 8 100 4 050 2 700 2 025 1 620 1 350 1 157 1 013 0 900 0 80 21 600 10 800 5 40...

Page 372: ... 488 1 239 1 060 0 926 IAC VERY INVERSE 0 5 1 451 0 656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 1 ...

Page 373: ...ustable from instanta neous to 600 00 seconds in steps of 10 ms EQ 5 35 EQ 5 36 where T Operate Time sec TDM Multiplier setting I Input Current Ipickup Pickup Current setting TRESET Reset Time in seconds assuming energy capacity is 100 and RESET Timed RECLOSER CURVES The T60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves See the FlexCurve section in this chapter for det...

Page 374: ...voltage restraint feature when enabled This is accom plished via the multipliers Mvr corresponding to the phase phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve see the figure below the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting If the voltage restraint feature is disabled the pickup level always remains at the setting value PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION Dis...

Page 375: ...1 BLOCK C PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 SOURCE PHASE TOC1 RESET PHASE TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PICKUP PHASE TOC1 INPUT IA Seq ABC Seq ACB Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Pickup Mult...

Page 376: ...u in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latc...

Page 377: ...ts via the BLOCK inputs of these elements Figure 5 108 PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 ECA 30 Range 0 to 359 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PHASE DIR POL V1 THRESHOLD 0 700 pu Ran...

Page 378: ...lock or trip on overcurrent as follows When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires In all cases direction...

Page 379: ...ctional element If current reversal is of a concern a longer delay in the order of 20 ms may be needed Figure 5 109 PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC NOTE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK PHASE DIR 1 ECA PHASE DIR 1 POL V ...

Page 380: ...IN MENU PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1 See page 5 235 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC2 See page 5 235 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC6 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC1 See page 5 236 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC2 See page 5 236 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC12 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 See page 5 237 ...

Page 381: ...the element is blocked the time accumulator will be cleared immediately Figure 5 110 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT Phasor Range Phasor RMS MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of ...

Page 382: ...ulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers CTs during double line and three phase faults Switch off transients during double line and three phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected ...

Page 383: ...SSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET 0 00 Ω Range 0 00 to 250 00 Ω in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA 75 Lag Range 90 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE 90 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP 0 050 pu Range 0 006 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE 90 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 R...

Page 384: ...quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection Iop 1 K Iinjected three phase pure zero sequence injection Iop 3 Iinjected The positive sequence restraint is removed for low currents If the positive sequence current is below 0 8 pu the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero This facilitates better response to high resistance faults ...

Page 385: ...ents Figure 5 112 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit If Voltage polarizing is selected the element uses the zero sequence voltage angle for polarization The user can use either the zero sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages or the zero sequence voltage supplied external...

Page 386: ...izing is performed and Voltage polarizing is ignored if the current polarizing signal is valid otherwise Voltage polarizing is performed if the voltage polarizing signal is valid If nei ther of them is valid neither forward nor reverse indication is given NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when Voltage Dual Dual V or Dual I polarizing mode is set T...

Page 387: ... SETTING SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD NEUTRA...

Page 388: ...UP 1 6 GROUND CURRENT For information on the Ground Time Overcurrent curves see Inverse TOC Characteristics on page 5 223 GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1 See page 5 243 MESSAGE GROUND TOC2 MESSAGE GROUND TOC6 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 See page 5 244 MESSAGE GROUND IOC2 MESSAGE GROUND IOC12 MESSAGE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1 See page 5 245 MESSAGE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 6 ...

Page 389: ... be cleared immediately These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT VT module The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0 02 to 46 times the CT rating This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled En...

Page 390: ...on range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 R...

Page 391: ... wye connected winding An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded wye winding will produce a fault current dependent on the ground impedance value and the fault position on the winding with respect to the neutral point The resultant primary current will be negligible for faults on the lower 30 of the winding since the fault voltage is not the system voltage but rather the result of the tran...

Page 392: ...f RGF Protec tion diagram explains the basic application and wiring rules Figure 5 117 TYPICAL APPLICATIONS OF RGF PROTECTION The relay incorporates low impedance restricted ground fault protection This low impedance form of protection faces potential stability problems An external phase to phase fault is an ultimate case Ideally there is neither ground IG nor neutral IN IA IB IC current present I...

Page 393: ...es the relay uses a multiplier of 1 in preparation for the next energization The multiplier of 3 is used during normal operation that is two cycles after the winding has been energized The lower multiplier is used to ensure better sensitivity when ener gizing a faulty winding The positive sequence component of the restraining signal IR1 is meant to provide restraint during symmetrical condi tions ...

Page 394: ...lculates the following values Igd 0 and Igr 10 pu EXAMPLE 4 INTERNAL LOW CURRENT SINGLE LINE TO GROUND FAULT UNDER FULL LOAD Given the following inputs IA 1 10 pu 0 IB 1 0 pu 120 IC 1 0 pu 120 and IG 0 05 pu 0 The relay calculates the following values I_0 0 033 pu 0 I_2 0 033 pu 0 and I_1 1 033 pu 0 Igd abs 3 0 0333 0 05 0 15 pu IR0 abs 3 0 033 0 05 0 05 pu IR2 3 0 033 0 10 pu IR1 1 033 8 0 1292 p...

Page 395: ...0 0 10 pu IR0 abs 3 3 3 0 0 10 pu IR2 3 3 3 10 pu IR1 3 3 33 3 33 0 pu and Igr 10 pu The differential current is 100 of the restraining current 5 6 10 BREAKER FAILURE ANSI 50BF PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 BREAKER FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE 1 6 BREAKER FAILURE 1 BF1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE BF1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAGE BF1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range ...

Page 396: ... in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 t...

Page 397: ...aker failure condition via three paths Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone The delayed paths are associated with breaker failure timers 1 2 and 3 which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer num bers These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow ...

Page 398: ...gh set and low set current supervision will guarantee correct operation BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal in supervision level Gener ally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker Neutral current supervision is used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity This setting is valid ...

Page 399: ...ed BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker before a breaker opening resistor is inserted Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity This setting is valid only for three pole breaker failure schemes BF1 ...

Page 400: ...ollowing single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is supposed to trip The logic is segregated on a per pole basis The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings This setting is valid only for single pole breaker failure schemes Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command a three pole trip command should be given via outpu...

Page 401: ...m single pole breaker failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 2 Pickup Delay SETTING AND Use Timer 3 SETTINGS Yes 1 Breaker Pos 2 Phase A 3P Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase B Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase C Off 0 Breaker Test On Off 0 AND Initiated from single pole breaker failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 3 Pickup Delay SETTING AND AND OR AND OR OR SETTING Phase Current HiSet Pickup RUN IA 0 LoSet Time Delay SETTING SET...

Page 402: ...TO SHEET 2 OF 2 Initiated TO SHEET 2 OF 2 827068 cdr BF1 FUNCTION Disable 0 Enable 1 SETTING BF1 BLOCK Off 0 SETTING BF1 INITIATE Off 0 SETTING BF1 USE SEAL IN YES 1 NO 0 SETTING BF1 USE AMP SUPV YES 1 NO 0 SETTING IA IB IN IC BF1 SOURCE SETTING IA PICKUP RUN BF1 PH AMP SUPV SETTINGS PICKUP BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP RUN RUN RUN IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Page 403: ...ICKUP SETTING AND SETTING BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING AND SETTING NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 1 SETTING BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 3 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 A 3P Φ Off 0 SETTING BF1 BREAKER TEST ON Off 0 SETTING BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING SETTINGS IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY 0 SETTING RUN RUN IA PICKUP RUN BF1 N AMP L...

Page 404: ... of external devices by operat ing an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 See page 5 260 MESSAGE PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2 See page 5 260 MESSAGE PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE3 See page 5 260 MESSAGE PHASE OVERVOLTA...

Page 405: ...ickup level for a specified period of time The time delay is adjustable from 0 to 600 00 seconds in steps of 0 01 The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay char acteristic The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below EQ 5 45 where T operating time D undervoltage delay setting D 0 00 operates instantaneously V secondary voltage applied...

Page 406: ...e to Ground Phase to Phase MESSAGE PHASE UV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 CURVE Definite Time Range Definite Time Inverse Time MESSAGE PHASE UV1 DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE 0 100 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE UV1 ...

Page 407: ...SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic Operand MESSAGE PHASE OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched D...

Page 408: ...lement must be configured for a phase VT VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element This function requires the VTs to be wye connected Figure 5 127 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP 0 3...

Page 409: ...cs The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element The element resets instantaneously The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked Figure 5 128 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE ...

Page 410: ...elta VT connection Figure 5 129 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0...

Page 411: ...is set to Phase ground then the operating quantity for this element will be the phase to ground nominal volt age It is beneficial to use the phase to phase voltage mode for this element when the T60 device is applied on an iso lated or resistance grounded system 3 When the auxiliary voltage Vx is used regarding the condition for None phase voltage setting mentioned above then the 1 pu value is the...

Page 412: ...tiplier to 20 results a time delay of 20 seconds to operate when above the Volts Hz pickup setting Instantaneous operation can be obtained the same way by set ting the TD multiplier to 0 INVERSE CURVE A The curve for the volts hertz inverse curve A shape is derived from the formula EQ 5 46 where T Operating Time TDM Time Delay Multiplier delay in seconds V fundamental RMS value of voltage pu F fre...

Page 413: ...here T Operating Time TDM Time Delay Multiplier delay in sec V fundamental RMS value of voltage pu F frequency of voltage signal pu Pickup volts per hertz pickup setpoint pu The volts hertz inverse B curves are shown below Figure 5 132 VOLTS PER HERTZ CURVES INVERSE CURVE B Multiples of volts per hertz pickup Time to trip in seconds Time delay setting 830738A1 CDR T TDM V F Pickup 1 when V F Picku...

Page 414: ... Operating Time TDM Time Delay Multiplier delay in sec V fundamental RMS value of voltage pu F frequency of voltage signal pu Pickup volts per hertz pickup setpoint pu The volts hertz inverse C curves are shown below Figure 5 133 VOLTS PER HERTZ CURVES INVERSE CURVE C T TDM V F Pickup 0 5 1 when V F Pickup Time to trip in seconds Multiples of volts per hertz pickup 830740A1 CDR Time delay setting ...

Page 415: ...specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus a list of element operate type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus If more than one operate type operand is required it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE T...

Page 416: ...delay should be set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response...

Page 417: ...c operand MESSAGE GROUP 1 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 2 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 6 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SETTING GROUP EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled SETTINGS Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 OR SETTINGS Enabled TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Off TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND AND L...

Page 418: ...ing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to On This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions such as the breaker being open The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which when set makes the partic ular setting group active for use by any grouped element A priority scheme ensures that only one grou...

Page 419: ...ange Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE Time out Range Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE Rest...

Page 420: ...herwise the change will not take place and an alarm will be set SELECTOR 1 STEP UP This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal The position changes incrementally wrapping up from the last SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE to the first position 1 Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than ev...

Page 421: ...he SELECTOR TIME OUT setting after the last activity of the three bit control inputs Note that the stepping up control input and three bit control input have independent acknowledging signals SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK accordingly SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay When set to Restore the last position of the selector stored in...

Page 422: ...hese diagrams T represents a time out setting Figure 5 137 TIME OUT MODE 842737A1 CDR STEP UP 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 pre existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3 bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton T T T T changed to 7 with a 3 bit input STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM ...

Page 423: ...p it should synchronize the setting group to the three bit control input Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SETTING GROUPS BLK Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 2 GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 3 Make the...

Page 424: ...lowing changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s The logic for the selector switch is shown below Figure 5 139 SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC 842012A2 CDR step up acknowledge 3 bit position out ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR ...

Page 425: ...rameter below the minimum voltage current setting The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfre quency element to operate This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to picku...

Page 426: ...The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the after load shedding restoration The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup Figure 5 141 OVERFREQ...

Page 427: ...ence voltage Overvoltage supervision should be used to pre vent operation under specific system conditions such as faults FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element The supervising function responds to the positive sequence current Typical application includes load shedding Set the pickup threshold to zero if no overcurrent supervisi...

Page 428: ...but only if the frequency is already below certain level such as for load shedding this setting should be set to the required frequency level If the signal source assigned to the frequency rate of change element is only set to auxiliary VT then the minimum voltage supervision is 3 V Figure 5 142 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SCHEME LOGIC NOTE V_1 PICKUP FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK Off RUN FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE Pos ...

Page 429: ...ifference ΔF slip frequency It can be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 ΔΦ at a frequency equal to the frequency difference ΔF This time can be calculated by SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SYNCHK1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 ...

Page 430: ... difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF Once the Synchrocheck element has operated the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out assuming the other two conditions voltage and angle remain satisfied SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by pass synchronism c...

Page 431: ...iary Voltage to check the synchronism conditions If using a single CT VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck Exception Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxil iary voltage 2 The relay measures frequency and Volts Hz from an in...

Page 432: ...t SETTINGS ΔF Maximum Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis SETTING ΔΦ Maximum Max Angle Diff SETTING ΔV Maximum Max Volt Diff AND OR XOR AND AND AND AND AND 827076AD CDR ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck 1 ΔV Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ Synchrocheck 1 ΔF AND SETTINGS Enabled 1 Function Off 0 Block AND AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC OPERA...

Page 433: ... for pickup and reset delays for the output operand DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation If a pickup delay is not required set to 0 To avoid nuisance alarms set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DEL...

Page 434: ...ions it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper ation is required The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil If the circuit presents a high resis tance the trickle current will fall be...

Page 435: ...t continuously independent of the breaker position open or closed a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided as shown in the fig ure below This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor see figure below across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit In this case it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit...

Page 436: ...operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than HI equal to EQL or less than LO the set value COUNTER 1 UP Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2 147 483 647 counts the counter will rollover to 2 147 483 648 COUNTER 1 DOWN Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the cou...

Page 437: ...operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and resetting the count to 0 COUNTER 1 FREEZE COUNT Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continuing counting The present accumulated value and captured frozen valu...

Page 438: ...AKER 6 ARCING CURRENT See page 5 293 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 1 See page 5 296 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 2 See page 5 296 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 See page 5 301 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 2 See page 5 301 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 3 See page 5 301 MESSAGE CT FAILURE 1 DETECTOR See page 5 304 MESSAGE CT FAILURE 2 DETECTOR See page 5 304 MESSAGE CT FAILURE 3 DETECTOR See page 5 304 MESSAGE CT FAILU...

Page 439: ...ted to include the total arcing period The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature and reset of an internal low set overcurrent function Cor rection is implemented to account for a non zero reset time of the overcurrent function Breaker arcing currents ...

Page 440: ...s initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part starting the integration of the measured current BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set Figure 5 148 ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT Initiate Breaker Contacts Part Arc Extinguished 100 ms Programmable Start Delay Start Integration Stop Integration Total Area Breaker Arcing Current kA cycle ...

Page 441: ...ING AMPS BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC BKR 1 OPERATING TIME BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC BKR1 ARC OP BKR1 ARC DPO BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE IA IB IC Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 NO 0 YES 1 Enabled 1 AND AND OR 859750A1 CDR KA Cycle Limit 2 SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP DELAY 100 ms 0 0 Set All To Zero Add to Accumulator Integrate...

Page 442: ...None SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP 0 850 pu Range 0 000 to 1 500 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP 1000 V Range 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP 0 600 pu...

Page 443: ...ns prior to flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is greater than the pickup setting 3 IA IB IC 0 no current flows through the breaker 4 ΔVA is greater than pickup not applicable in this scheme The conditions at flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 IA IB or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker 3 ΔVA is greater than pickup not applicable in this sc...

Page 444: ... BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open status of the breaker A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro vide flashover detection The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP This setting specifies a pi...

Page 445: ...ds per breaker pole that supervise the operation of the element per phase Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection elements breaker failure and close and trip commands A six cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic operand resets BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected ...

Page 446: ...BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC Enable 1 RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 none VB Vb IB Block OFF 0 VA PKP FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 Phase B logic Phase B logic Phase B logic Pha...

Page 447: ...ng phase and the BRK RESTRIKE 1 OP operand is asserted for a short period of time The user can add counters and other logic to facilitate the decision making process as to the appropriate actions upon detecting a single restrike or a series of consecutive restrikes BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE BKR RSTR 1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand ME...

Page 448: ... FUNCTION This setting enable and disables operation of the breaker restrike detection ele ment BRK RSTR 1 BLOCK This setting is used to block operation of the breaker restrike detection element BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 SOURCE This setting selects the source of the current for this element This source must have a valid CT bank assigned BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP This setting specifies the pickup level of...

Page 449: ...tection logic BRK RSTR 1 CLS CMD This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand indicating a breaker close command It must be logic 1 when breaker is closed Figure 5 153 BREAKER RESTRIKE SCHEME LOGIC RUN Current interruption detection logic I 0 05 pu mag for t cycle ARMED RESET SETTING Enabled BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 BLK AND SETTING IA BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 SOURCE IB IC SETTING O...

Page 450: ...esenting operation of some remote current protection elements via communication chan nels can also be chosen CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 1 This setting selects the current source for input 1 The most critical protection element should also be assigned to the same source CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 the main supervised CT source CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 2 T...

Page 451: ...kup delay of the CT failure element Figure 5 154 CT FAILURE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC CT FAIL 1 FUNCTION CT FAIL 1 BLOCK CT FAIL 1 3IO INPUT1 CT FAIL 1 3IO INPUT1 PKP CT FAIL 1 3VO INPUT CT FAIL 1 3VO INPUT CT FAIL 1 3IO INPUT2 CT FAIL 1 3IO INPUT2 PKP CT FAIL 1 PICKUP DELAY AND OR SETTING Enabled 1 SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING Off 0 SRC1 RUN 3IO PICKUP 3IO PICKUP 3V...

Page 452: ...ent can indicate a VT fuse fail conditions These noted indications of fuse failure can also be present when faults are present on the system so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure decla rations during these events is provided Once the fuse failure condition is declared it is sealed in until the cause that generated it disappears An additional condition is introduced to inhibit ...

Page 453: ...pu SRC1 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 2 cycles 20 cycles SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TIMER OPEN POLE OP The OPEN POLE OP operand applies to the C60 D60 L60 L90 N60 Neutral Wire Open Detect SETTING Enabled 1 SOURCE 1 3V_0 3rd Harmonic SETTING Run 3V_0 3rd Harm setting 3 HARM PKP AND SRC1 3V0 3nd Harmonic FLEX ANALOG AND 5 c...

Page 454: ...s defined as follows EQ 5 51 In the above equations top time to operate τop thermal protection trip time constant I measured overload RMS current Ip measured load RMS current before overload occurs k IEC 255 8 k factor applied to IB defining maximum permissible current above nominal current THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE THERMAL PROTECTIO...

Page 455: ...ime delayed using following formula EQ 5 52 In the above equation τrst thermal protection trip time constant Tmin is a minimum reset time setting Figure 5 156 IEC 255 8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated each power cycle When current is greater than the pickup level In k IB element ...

Page 456: ...l calculations are performed per phase If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase the thermal overload protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0 05 in all three phases The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below Figure 5 157 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC Table 5 35 TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS PROTECTED EQUIPMENT TIME CONSTANT ...

Page 457: ... a user settable debounce time in order for the T60 to validate the new contact state In the figure below the debounce time is set at 2 5 ms thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state mark no 1 in the diagram Once validated de bounced the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence th...

Page 458: ...to filter the LOW HIGH marks no 1 2 3 and 4 in the figure below and HIGH LOW marks no 5 6 7 and 8 below transitions Figure 5 158 INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detec...

Page 459: ...utput operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off If set to Latched the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input The self reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally...

Page 460: ...to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change of state and interruption of current in the trip circuit The most dependable protection of the initiating contac...

Page 461: ... trip coil of the contact The relay will seal in this input to safely open the contact Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 off any activity of the RESET input such as subsequent chattering will not have any effect With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active logic 1 the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting OUTPUT H1a TYPE This settin...

Page 462: ...any specific sequence of operation such as make before break If required the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con trol inputs as shown in the next application example Application Example 3 A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement this functionality as described below Write the fo...

Page 463: ...ority GOOSE messages have additional advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN virtual LAN and Ethernet priority tagging functionality The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information The IEC 61850 specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs that represent the state of two pre defined events and 30 user defined events All remaini...

Page 464: ...ce The REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET setting provides for the choice of the T60 fixed DNA UserSt dataset that is containing DNA and UserSt bit pairs or one of the configurable datasets Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node For this rea son logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items GGIO3 is not necessary to...

Page 465: ...fault to logic 0 When communication resumes the input becomes fully operational For additional information on GSSE GOOOSE messaging see the Remote Devices section in this chapter 5 8 7 REMOTE DOUBLE POINT STATUS INPUTS PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 5 Remote double point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device Each remote ...

Page 466: ...ed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators target message and or graphical panel annunciator windows Once set the latching mechanism holds all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches not including FlexLogic latches to the reset state where the initiating condition has cleared The...

Page 467: ...irst communication exchange the input will default to Logic 1 When communication resumes the input becomes fully operational Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest Off freezes the input in case of lost communications If the latest state is not known such as after relay power up but before the first communication exchange the input will default to Logic 0 When communication resumes the inpu...

Page 468: ... signal from downstream devices say 2 3 and 4 to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar as shown in the figure below Figure 5 163 SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2 3 and 4 to block Device 1 If not blocked Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time d...

Page 469: ...e architecture shown below The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission Figure 5 165 SINGLE CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly Therefore Device 2 must act as a bridge The fol lowing settings should be applied UR IED 1 DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER 2 th...

Page 470: ...FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel This allows the user to create distributed protec tion and control schemes via dedicated communications channels Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality The teleprotection function must...

Page 471: ... outputs is dependent on the number of com munication channels and terminals On two terminal two channel systems they are processed continuously on each chan nel and mapped separately per channel Therefore to achieve redundancy the user must assign the same operand on both channels teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end On three termin...

Page 472: ...oint values with no units The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to configure GOOSE Analog so that it can be used in a FlexElement GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG 1 DEFAULT 1000 000 Range 1000000 000 to 1000000 000 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE Default Value Range Default Value Last Known MESSAGE GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS Range up to 4 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GOOSE ANA...

Page 473: ...ng settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input Table 5 37 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS ELEMENT BASE UNITS dcmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs FREQUENCY fBASE 1 Hz FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE df dtBASE 1 Hz s PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE 360 degrees see the UR angle referencing convention POWER FACTOR PFBASE 1 00 RTDs BASE ...

Page 474: ...ed as a 32 bit unsigned integer number UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known the value of the GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value When the sending device is offline and this setting value is Default Value then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger...

Page 475: ...re automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot F The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled no actual values are created for the chan nel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel this ID will be included in the channel actual value along with the ...

Page 476: ...re automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled there will not be an actual value created for the channel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel this ID will be included in the channel...

Page 477: ... 79 124 82 10 58 50 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160...

Page 478: ...wing rules are followed If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Enabled then the RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting value will be written to RRTD device If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Disabled then RRTD1 APPLICATION setting value is set as None If the RRTD 1 APPLICATION or RRTD 1 TYPE settings are changes then these settings are immediately written to the RRTD device RRTD 1 RRTD 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Dis...

Page 479: ...type Four different RTD types are available 100 Ω Nickel 10 Ω Copper 100 Ω Platinum and 120 Ω Nickel The RRTD converts resistance to temperature as per the values in the following table The T60 reads the RTD temper atures from the RRTD once every five seconds and applies protection accordingly The RRTDs can be used to provide RTD bias in the existing thermal model An RRTD open condition is detecte...

Page 480: ...the range of the RRTD unit RRTD 1 TRIP PKP DELAY This setting specifies time delay for the trip stage until the output can be asserted The range of 5 to 600 seconds differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit RRTD 1 TRIP RST DELAY This setting specifies the reset delay to seal in the trip signal RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING This setting allows securing trip signal by v...

Page 481: ...hecks the driving signal x in equations below for the minimum and maximum limits and subsequently re scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE The follow ing equation is applied EQ 5 55 DCMA OUTPUT F1 DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE DCMA OUTPUT F1 RANGE 1 to 1 mA Range 1 to 1 mA 0 to 1 m...

Page 482: ...ut current The setting is entered in per unit values The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current The setting is entered in per unit values The base units are def...

Page 483: ...ional details is EQ 5 62 The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored in pu are EQ 5 63 The following settings should be entered DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE SRC 1 Ia RMS DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE 4 to 20 mA DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL 0 000 pu DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL 1 260 pu The worst case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error 0 5 of the full sc...

Page 484: ...en if the VTs are connected in Delta see the Metering Conventions section in chapter 6 while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings Consequently the settings required in this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of The worst case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error 0 5 of the full scale for the...

Page 485: ...ions based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs then the test procedure must take this into account When in Forcible mode the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the T60 to testing conditions To force contact inputs and outputs through relay ...

Page 486: ...e across the input terminals The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs Once enabled the relay is placed into test mode allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs The Test Mode LED will be on indicating that the relay is in test mode The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis abled Open or...

Page 487: ...nd 3 should open and contact input 4 should close Also contact output 1 should freeze contact output 2 should open contact output 3 should close and contact output 4 should remain fully opera tional The required settings are shown below To enable user programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu TEST MODE FUNCTION Enabled and...

Page 488: ...1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC TEST ANGLE 120 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST MAGNITUDE 500 00 kV Range 0 00 to 700 00 kV in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST ANGLE 0 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST MAGNITUDE 1 000 kA Range 0 000 to 9 999 kA in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST ANGLE 10 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PM...

Page 489: ...in the outgoing data frames When required it is recommended to use the user pro grammable digital channels to signal the IEEE C37 118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measure ments The UR Synchrophasor Implementation defines a test mode which sends a pre defined set of Synchrophasors out over the communication channel when the test mode function setting is enabled In tes...

Page 490: ...5 344 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 5 10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS 5 ...

Page 491: ... page 6 5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS See page 6 6 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6 7 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6 7 FLEX STATES See page 6 7 ETHERNET See page 6 7 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING See page 6 8 DIRECT INPUTS See page 6 9 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS See page 6 9 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 6 10 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS See page 6 10 ...

Page 492: ... See page 6 22 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE See page 6 23 FLEXELEMENTS See page 6 23 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 6 24 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT See page 6 24 PMU AGGREGATOR See page 6 25 VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 See page 6 25 VOLTS PER HERTZ 2 See page 6 25 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS See page 6 26 TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 6 26 TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS See page 6 26 DISTANCE See page 6 26...

Page 493: ...ACTUAL VALUES 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 EVENT RECORDS See page 6 28 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 6 28 DATA LOGGER See page 6 29 PMU RECORDS See page 6 29 MAINTENANCE See page 6 30 ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION See page 6 31 FIRMWARE REVISIONS See page 6 31 ...

Page 494: ...cates the ID of the virtual input For example Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been establ...

Page 495: ...put in terms of the default name array index The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output For form A contact outputs the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off VOff IOff On IOn and VOn For form C contact outputs the state is displayed as Off or On TELEPROTECTION INPUTS TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1 1 Off Range Off On MESSAGE TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1...

Page 496: ...b STATISTICS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 Statistical data two types for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here The STNUM number is obtained from the indicated remote device and increments whenever a change of state of at least one item occurs in the GSSE GOOSE message The SQNUM number is obtained from the indicated remote device and increments w...

Page 497: ...nge The current position only an integer from 0 through 7 is the actual value 6 2 10 FLEX STATES PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES There are 256 FlexStateTM bits available The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit 6 2 11 ETHERNET PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 Counter 1 ACCUM 0 MESSAGE Counter 1 FROZEN 0 MESSAGE Counter 1 FROZEN YYYY MM...

Page 498: ...re or that the error cannot be estimated PORT 1 3 PTP STATE is the present state of the port s PTP clock The PTP clock state is DISABLED is the port s function setting is Disabled NO SIGNAL if enabled but no signal from an active master has been found and selected CALIBRATING if an active master has been selected but lock is not at present established SYNCH D NO PDELAY if the port is synchronized ...

Page 499: ...heck High values for either of these counts may indicate on a problem with wiring the communication channel or one or more relays The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I O COUNTERS command The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT 32 values represent the state of each direct input 6 2 14 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT DEVICES STAT...

Page 500: ...D PROTOCOL STATUS a FAST EXCHANGE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS FAST EXCHANGE 1 These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network The EGD signature and packet size for the fast EGD exchange is displayed b SLOW EXCHANGE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS SLOW EXCHANGE 1 2 These values provide information that ...

Page 501: ...d 6 2 18 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS COMM STATUS REMAINING CONNECT These values specify the remaining number of TCP connections still available for each protocol The display depends on the options applicable to your device for example the PMU entry does not display when not applicable Each time a con nection is used the remaining number of connections decrements When rele...

Page 502: ...r 2 for details TOTAL RECEIVED PORT A is a counter for total messages received either from DANPs or from SANs on Port A TOTAL RECEIVED PORT B is a counter for total messages received either from DANPs or from SANs on Port B TOTAL ERRORS is a counter for total messages received with an error bad port code frame length too short MISMATCHES PORT A is a counter for total messages received with an erro...

Page 503: ...rrent Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Negative PF Lead Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Negative PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Positive PF Lead Current Generator Generator Inductive Inductive Resistive Resistive Generator Generator UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY G G M M G G VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 1 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 2 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 3 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 4 Q Q Q Q PF Lead ...

Page 504: ...not measurable the phase angles are not referenced The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction and are presented as negative in the lagging direction to more closely align with power system metering conventions This is illustrated below Figure 6 2 UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components f...

Page 505: ...strated in the following figure Figure 6 3 MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS ABC phase rotation ACB phase rotation Table 6 1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE SYSTEM VOLTAGES SEC V VT CONN RELAY INPUTS SEC V SYMM COMP SEC V VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 84 9 313 138 3 97 85 4 241 WYE 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 19 5 192 56 5 7 23 3 1...

Page 506: ... harmonic and 5th harmonic currents are forced to zero b THERMAL ELEMENTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSFORMER THERMAL ELEMENTS DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT REFERENCE WINDING Winding 1 MESSAGE DIFF PHASOR Iad 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE REST PHASOR Iar 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF 2ND HARM Iad 0 0 fo 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF 5TH HARM Iad 0 0 fo 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF PHASOR Ibd 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE REST PHASOR Ibr 0 000...

Page 507: ...ground CTs assignments for this particular source For example if no phase VT is assigned to this source then any voltage energy and power val ues will be unavailable b PHASE CURRENT METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT MESSAGE XFMR LIFE LOST 100000 hrs SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 Se...

Page 508: ... see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES d PHASE VOLTAGE METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ia 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ib 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ic 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR In 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ I1 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2 0 000 A 0 0 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 S...

Page 509: ...rce see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES f POWER METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER MESSAGE SRC 1 RMS Vbc 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 RMS Vca 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vab 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vca 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ V1 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2 0 000 V 0 0 AUXILIARY ...

Page 510: ...hasors Î is the conjugate of I g ENERGY METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 ENERGY The metered values for real and reactive energy are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES Because energy values are accumulated these values should be recorded and then reset ...

Page 511: ...r statistical metering purposes Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DEMAND SRC 1 SRC 1 DMD IA 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IA MAX 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IA DATE 2001 07 31 16 30 07 MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB MAX 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB DATE 2001 07 31 16 30 07 MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IC 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IC MAX ...

Page 512: ...d The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients j CURRENT HARMONICS AND THD METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 CURRENT HARMONICS The metered current harmonics values are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated s...

Page 513: ... BASE UNITS Sheet 1 of 2 BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS Brk X Acc Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 1 kA2 cycle DCmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs FREQUENCY fBASE 1 Hz FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE df dtBASE 1 Hz s PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE 360 degrees see the UR angle referencing conv...

Page 514: ... and transformer reference primary current for transformer differential currents ZBASE ZBASE PhaseVTSecondary PhaseCTSecondary where PhaseVTSecondary and PhaseCTSecondary are the secondary nominal voltage and the secondary nominal current of the distance source In case multiple CT inputs are summed as one source current and mapped as the distance source use the PhaseCTSecondary value from the CT w...

Page 515: ...clude the Ethernet UDP or IP layers PDU sizes approaching approximately 1500 bytes result in fragmented data frames causing increased network traffic 6 3 11 VOLTS PER HERTZ PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 2 The volts per hertz actual values are displayed in this menu MESSAGE PMU 1 V2 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V0 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Substituted with zero if delta connected VTs MES...

Page 516: ...AL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value 6 3 14 DISTANCE PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING DISTANCE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1 RGF 1 DIFF Igd 0 000 A MESSAGE RGF 1 RESTR Igr 0 000 A DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx 0 000 mA RTD INPUT xx RTD INP...

Page 517: ... from zone 1 to zone 5 ZAG ZBG ZCG are calculated only if at least one ground distance zone is enabled otherwise all the metering quantities for ground distance impedance ZAG ZBG and ZCG are reset to zero including magnitude and angle Note that VTs of the distance source must be connected in Wye if the ground distance element is enabled MESSAGE CA LOOP IMPEDANCE ZCA 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE CA LOOP IMPED...

Page 518: ... major output operands generate events not every operand Elements that assert output per phase for example log operating phase output only without asserting the common three phase operand event 6 4 3 OSCILLOGRAPHY PATH ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available The CYCLES PER RECORD value is cal...

Page 519: ...h values are static Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records 6 4 5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS PATH ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS PMU RECORDS The number of triggers applicable to the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated by the NUMBER OF TRIGGERS value The status of the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated as follows PATH ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS PMU RECO...

Page 520: ...Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP φA 0 00 kA2 cyc MESSAGE BKR 1 ARCING AMP φB 0 00 kA2 cyc MESSAGE BKR 1 ARCING AMP φC 0 00 kA2 cyc MESSAGE BKR 1 OPERATING TIME φA 0 ms MESSAGE BKR 1 OPERATING TIME φB 0 ms MES...

Page 521: ...xample order code shown MESSAGE SERIAL NUMBER Range standard GE serial number format MESSAGE ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 Range standard Ethernet MAC address format MESSAGE MANUFACTURING DATE 0 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MESSAGE PMU FEATURE ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE CT VT ADVANCED DIAG ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE OPERATING TIME 0 00 00 Range operating time in HH MM SS MESSAGE LAST SETT...

Page 522: ...6 32 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 6 5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ...

Page 523: ...and entry 7 1 2 VIRTUAL INPUTS PATH COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input This status will be a state off logic 0 or on logic 1 COMMANDS MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS MESSAGE COMMA...

Page 524: ...entered to allow execution of this command The new time and date take effect when the ENTER key is pressed COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR USER FAULT REPORTS No Range No Yes CLEAR EVENT RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY No Range No Yes CLEAR DATA LOGGER No Range No Yes CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS No Range No Yes CLEAR BREAKER 2 ARCING AMPS No Range No Yes CLEAR DEMAND RECORDS No Range No Ye...

Page 525: ...se changes do not take effect unless the relay is rebooted With the CyberSentry option the Administrator or Operator role can initiate the Reboot Relay command The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific T60 service actions Presently there is only one service action available Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non volatile memory If a code other than 101 is ...

Page 526: ...hot time The PMU ONE SHOT PENDING operand indicates that the one shot operation is pending that is the present time is before the scheduled one shot time The PMU ONE SHOT OP operand indicates the one shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards When the function is disabled all three operands are de asserted The one shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a given T60 relay Fi...

Page 527: ...e referenced to different time scales Figure 7 2 USING THE PMU ONE SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC The one shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network Two or more PMU can be pre scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time When frozen the measurements could be collected usi...

Page 528: ... will be included if applicable If a tar get message status changes the status with the highest priority will be displayed If a self test error is detected a message appears indicating the cause of the error For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed 7 1 10 RELAY SELF TESTS a DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self test diagnostic che...

Page 529: ...ched target message No Description of problem A FlexLogic equation is incorrect How often the test is performed The test is event driven performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified What to do Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors Latched target message No Description of problem The PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the T60 is not pro g...

Page 530: ...ch as fast distance protection Synchrophasors Frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency calculations to conform to C37 118 2005 standard The new functionality leveraging the hardware is supported with firmware revision 7 25 and above When using an older revision of the process card with a new firmware revision 7 25 Module Failure 31 indicates the limited functionality If your application requires ...

Page 531: ...hysical damage or perform a continuity test The IRIG B receiver is functioning Check the input signal level it may be less than specification If none of these apply then contact the factory Latched target message No Description of problem No PTP enabled port has good PTP signal input How often the test is performed Activated when no acceptable signal is being received What to do Ensure the followi...

Page 532: ...est is performed Every second What to do Check direct input and output configuration and wiring Latched target message No Description of problem One or more GOOSE devices are not responding How often the test is performed Event driven The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving This can be from 1 to 60 seconds depending on GOOSE packets What to do Check...

Page 533: ... being down How often the test is performed What to do Check the connection Latched target message No Description of problem The number of failures threshold was exceeded What to do Wait for the lockout interval and try to authenticate again Message Unauthorized firmware attempt Latched target message No Description of problem A firmware upgrade operation was attempted while the lock relay setting...

Page 534: ...tivated HARDFIBER SELF TEST ERROR MESSAGES In addition to those provided by the standard UR series devices the UR devices implement HardFiber self tests These are listed below Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self test message so troubleshooting is described here For other relays such at the B95Plus see that product s instructi...

Page 535: ...single origin Process Bus Trouble Minor Self Test Description Communications problems with one or more Bricks The text of the message identifies the affected field units This self test is initiated by low received signal levels at either the Brick or Process Card end and by the sustained failure to receive poll responses from the proper Brick Severity This self test error does not directly inhibit...

Page 536: ...7 14 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 7 1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7 ...

Page 537: ...e current from a particular feeder is used for bus directional comparison if its magnitude is greater than 0 2 Irestraint or it is greater than 2 times its CT rating Second for and only for the selected fault currents the phase angle between a given current and the sum of all the remaining currents is checked The sum of all the remaining currents is the differential current less the current under ...

Page 538: ...8 2 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 8 1 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE 8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 ...

Page 539: ...the Winding 1 Phase A CT input and y current IY into the Wind ing 2 Phase A CT input TESTING The tests of the differential restraint characteristic verify the minimum pickup point the intersection point of Breakpoint 1 and Slope 1 and the intersection point of Breakpoint 2 and Slope 2 For simplicity enter the following settings for each winding SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING 1 4 WINDING 1 4 CONN...

Page 540: ... 2 is tested as follows Refer to the diagram below for details 1 Preset the Iy current to a magnitude that results in the restraint current being equal to Breakpoint 2 Use the following calculation to define the magnitude of the injected current EQ 9 5 2 At the above current restraint the IXOP2 current required to operate the element is calculated as EQ 9 6 3 Preset the Ix current to and switch on...

Page 541: ...ommended This utility indicates graphically whether the relay should operate based on the settings and winding current injection This allows the tester to define and confirm various points on the operating characteristic The spreadsheet can be found at GE Multilin website look in the support documents for the product Figure 9 2 CURRENT DISTRIBUTION ON A Y YG0 TRANSFORMER WITH b c FAULT ON LV SIDE ...

Page 542: ...de Ir The differential current Id is the vector sum of the compensated currents and Ir is the larg est compensated current Compensation refers to vector and magnitude corrections applied to the currents from the HV and LV transformer sides The tests verify the operation and no operation response for points from all regions of the percentage differential character istic These tests are Test for zer...

Page 543: ... restraint current should be read from the T60 actual values menu The relay will not operate since Id is still lower that the 0 1 pu MINIMUM PICKUP setting 6 Increase I1 to 0 2 A The differential current increases to and 7 Verify that the Percent Differential element operates and the following are displayed in the actual values menu WINDING 1 WINDING 2 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I1 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT ...

Page 544: ...e 1 setting of 15 The actual ratio is 11 3 3 Adjust the I1 current as shown below thereby increasing Id and verify that the element operates 4 The following differential and restraint current should appear in the T60 actual values menu 5 The actual ratio is now 17 Verify that the element operates correctly WINDING 1 WINDING 2 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I1 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I2 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 B 0 48 A...

Page 545: ...website look in the support documents for the product With this tool the user can see the preset curve point ratios and the actual ratio as per the entered test currents The tool graphically indicates differential and restraint current magnitudes and indi cates whether the relay should operate 3 In this example a ratio of causes the element to trip Decreasing I1 as shown in the table below increas...

Page 546: ...be the principles of testing the differential element for all regions from the operating characteristic For verification of more points one should consider adjusting the magnitude of the restraint current Ir to the desired portion of the characteristic and change the other current to vary Id until the relay operates Use the Excel tool to compare the actual and expected operating values A blank res...

Page 547: ... 521 180 0 102 0 0 3 180 Operate Id 0 102 Min PKP B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 108 180 0 0 0 102 0 0 3 0 Slope 1 A 0 4435 0 1 6 180 0 110 0 0 9026 180 Block Id Ir 11 9 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 4435 180 0 0 0 0 0 0 Slope 1 A 0 4425 0 1 7 180 0 165 0 0 979 180 Operate Id Ir 16 8 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 4425 180 0 0 0 165 0 0 979 0 Intermediate Slope 1 2 A 1 2 0 5 180 0 675 180 2 882 180 Block Id Ir 23 4 B 0 0 0...

Page 548: ...0 8 0 0 0 0 8 0 C 0 25 0 0 8 180 0 0 0 8 180 Min Pickup change the Min PKP to 0 2 pu A 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id 0 051 Min PKP B 0 5 180 0 95 0 0 154 0 0 948 0 C 0 25 0 0 95 180 0 155 0 0 950 180 Minimum Pickup A 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operate Id 0 102 Min PKP B 0 5 180 1 05 0 0 253 0 1 049 0 C 0 25 0 1 05 180 0 255 0 1 050 180 Slope 1 return the Min PKP to 0 1 pu A 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id Ir 13...

Page 549: ...0 0 065 0 0 230 270 C 0 09 270 0 23 90 0 065 0 0 230 90 Min Pickup A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operate Id 0 101 Min PKP B 0 21 90 0 486 270 0 102 0 0 486 270 C 0 21 270 0 486 90 0 101 0 0 486 90 Slope 1 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id Ir 14 15 B 0 651 90 1 39 270 0 195 0 1 39 270 C 0 651 270 1 39 90 0 195 0 1 39 90 Slope 1 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operate Id Ir 16 8 15 B 0 63 90 1 39 270 0 233 0 1 39 270 C 0 63 270 1 3...

Page 550: ...0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id Ir 93 2 Slope 2 95 B 0 315 90 8 33 270 7 77 270 8 33 270 C 0 315 270 8 33 90 7 77 90 8 33 90 Slope 2 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operate Id Ir 96 Slope 2 95 B 0 18 90 8 33 270 8 270 8 33 270 C 0 18 270 8 33 90 8 90 8 33 90 TEST PHASE INJECTED CURRENT DISPLAYED CURRENT STATUS W1 CURRENT W2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RESTRAINT ...

Page 551: ...follows For INRUSH INHIBIT MODE set to 2 out of 3 1 Set the INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION to Trad 2nd and the INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL to 20 2 Inject currents into one CT bank one winding only until the biased differential operates for all three phases 3 Apply a second harmonic to Phase A higher than the set threshold and monitor operation of Phases A B and C The element should stay operated on all three ph...

Page 552: ...to the relay until the biased Differential element operates 3 Confirm that ONLY the differential element has operated 4 Increase the 5th harmonic content level until the element drops out Record this value as the Overexcitation Inhibit Level Pickup 5 Gradually decrease the harmonic content level until the element picks up Record this value as the Overexcitation Inhibit Level Dropout 6 Switch off t...

Page 553: ... zero sequence component As such the same signal must not be injected to all three phases or the injected signal will be completely filtered out For an underfrequency element using phase quantities the phase A signal must be above the MIN VOLT AMP setting value There fore either inject into phase A only or inject a balanced three phase signal Figure 9 6 TYPICAL UNDERFREQUENCY ELEMENT TEST TIMING T...

Page 554: ...e time timer This is exclusive of the time taken by the frequency responding component to pickup The T60 oscillography can be used to measure the time between the calculated source frequency crossing the threshold and element operation however this method omits the delay in the calculated source frequency The security features of the source frequency measurement algorithm result in the calculated ...

Page 555: ...___ Id _______________ B C Min Pickup A Status ____________ Id _______________ B C Slope 1 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Slope 1 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Intermediate Slope 1 2 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Intermediate Slope 1 2 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Slope 2 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Slope 2 A Status ...

Page 556: ...OMMISSIONING TEST TABLES 9 COMMISSIONING 9 9 6 3 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TESTS Table 9 5 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST RESULTS PHASE INJECTED DISPLAYED STATUS BLOCK OPERATE W1 CURRENT A W1 5TH HARMONIC W2 CURRENT A W2 5TH HARMONIC Id PU 5TH HARMONIC Ir PU A B C ...

Page 557: ...llows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left once the thumb screw has been removed as shown below This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal The new wide angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows ea...

Page 558: ...ert a module ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position The ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis engage the clips simultaneously When the clips have locked into position the module wi...

Page 559: ...nel enhanced front panel 4 For the standard front panel it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module which is typically in the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel To remove the front panel unscrew the bracket on the front left side of the unit 5 Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply module and remove...

Page 560: ...e unit 17 Remove the power supply module by simultaneously pulling the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the module and sliding it out 18 Unscrew all four screws not three that attach the metal cover to the module The fourth screw is at the back end of the module on the opposite side from the clips beside the white electronics part see figure 19 Slide the metal cover away from the clips about...

Page 561: ...ια μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην Ευρωπαϊκή Κοινότητα είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο Cd τον μόλυβδο Pb ή τον υδράργυρο Hg Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον π...

Page 562: ...ri Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen Se produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere symboler for å indikere at kadmium Cd bly Pb eller kvikksølv Hg forekommer Returner batteriet til leverandøren din eller til et dedikert oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gjen...

Page 563: ...r avsedd deponering För mer information se www recyclethis info TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu inceleyiniz Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum Cd Kurşun Pb ya da Civa Hg içerebilir Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplam...

Page 564: ...vice for example to comply with data security regu lations On the computer settings files can identified by the urs extension To clear the current settings file create a default set tings file write it to the relay then delete all other urs files For the existing installation upgrading the firmware overwrites the flash memory Other files can be in standard formats such as COMTRADE or csv You canno...

Page 565: ...e correct information Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap foam material or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion the item s You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of cushioning material Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA to the factory GE GRID SOLUTIONS 650 MAR...

Page 566: ...GE Store the unit indoors in a cool dry place If possible store in the original packaging Follow the storage temperature range outlined in the Specifications To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously NOTICE ...

Page 567: ...an the battery there are no special requirements for disposal of the unit at the end its service life For customers located in the European Union dispose of the battery as outlined earlier To prevent non intended use of the unit remove the modules as outlined earlier dismantle the unit and recycle the metal when possible ...

Page 568: ...10 12 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 10 6 DISPOSAL 10 MAINTENANCE 10 ...

Page 569: ...812 RGF 6 Igd Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 6 differential ground current magnitude 5814 RGF 6 Igr Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 6 restricted ground current magnitude 5824 Field RTD 1 Value Field RTD 1 value 5825 Field RTD 2 Value Field RTD 2 value 5826 Field RTD 3 Value Field RTD 3 value 5827 Field RTD 4 Value Field RTD 4 value 5828 Field RTD 5 Value Field RTD 5 value 5829 Field RTD 6 Value...

Page 570: ...rent angle 6222 SRC 2 Ic Mag Amps Source 2 phase C current magnitude 6224 SRC 2 Ic Angle Degrees Source 2 phase C current angle 6225 SRC 2 In Mag Amps Source 2 neutral current magnitude 6227 SRC 2 In Angle Degrees Source 2 neutral current angle 6228 SRC 2 Ig RMS Amps Source 2 ground current RMS 6230 SRC 2 Ig Mag Amps Source 2 ground current magnitude 6232 SRC 2 Ig Angle Degrees Source 2 ground cur...

Page 571: ... magnitude 6352 SRC 4 Ic Angle Degrees Source 4 phase C current angle 6353 SRC 4 In Mag Amps Source 4 neutral current magnitude 6355 SRC 4 In Angle Degrees Source 4 neutral current angle 6356 SRC 4 Ig RMS Amps Source 4 ground current RMS 6358 SRC 4 Ig Mag Amps Source 4 ground current magnitude 6360 SRC 4 Ig Angle Degrees Source 4 ground current angle 6361 SRC 4 I_0 Mag Amps Source 4 zero sequence ...

Page 572: ... 6481 SRC 6 In Mag Amps Source 6 neutral current magnitude 6483 SRC 6 In Angle Degrees Source 6 neutral current angle 6484 SRC 6 Ig RMS Amps Source 6 ground current RMS 6486 SRC 6 Ig Mag Amps Source 6 ground current magnitude 6488 SRC 6 Ig Angle Degrees Source 6 ground current angle 6489 SRC 6 I_0 Mag Amps Source 6 zero sequence current magnitude 6491 SRC 6 I_0 Angle Degrees Source 6 zero sequence...

Page 573: ...G voltage angle 6732 SRC 2 Vcg Mag Volts Source 2 phase CG voltage magnitude 6734 SRC 2 Vcg Angle Degrees Source 2 phase CG voltage angle 6735 SRC 2 Vab RMS Volts Source 2 phase AB voltage RMS 6737 SRC 2 Vbc RMS Volts Source 2 phase BC voltage RMS 6739 SRC 2 Vca RMS Volts Source 2 phase CA voltage RMS 6741 SRC 2 Vab Mag Volts Source 2 phase AB voltage magnitude 6743 SRC 2 Vab Angle Degrees Source ...

Page 574: ...e sequence voltage angle 6848 SRC 4 Vag RMS Volts Source 4 phase AG voltage RMS 6850 SRC 4 Vbg RMS Volts Source 4 phase BG voltage RMS 6852 SRC 4 Vcg RMS Volts Source 4 phase CG voltage RMS 6854 SRC 4 Vag Mag Volts Source 4 phase AG voltage magnitude 6856 SRC 4 Vag Angle Degrees Source 4 phase AG voltage angle 6857 SRC 4 Vbg Mag Volts Source 4 phase BG voltage magnitude 6859 SRC 4 Vbg Angle Degree...

Page 575: ... Vx Angle Degrees Source 5 auxiliary voltage angle 6947 SRC 5 V_0 Mag Volts Source 5 zero sequence voltage magnitude 6949 SRC 5 V_0 Angle Degrees Source 5 zero sequence voltage angle 6950 SRC 5 V_1 Mag Volts Source 5 positive sequence voltage magnitude 6952 SRC 5 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 5 positive sequence voltage angle 6953 SRC 5 V_2 Mag Volts Source 5 negative sequence voltage magnitude 6955 SR...

Page 576: ... Sc VA Source 1 phase C apparent power 7192 SRC 1 PF Source 1 three phase power factor 7193 SRC 1 Phase A PF Source 1 phase A power factor 7194 SRC 1 Phase B PF Source 1 phase B power factor 7195 SRC 1 Phase C PF Source 1 phase C power factor 7200 SRC 2 P Watts Source 2 three phase real power 7202 SRC 2 Pa Watts Source 2 phase A real power 7204 SRC 2 Pb Watts Source 2 phase B real power 7206 SRC 2...

Page 577: ...phase C apparent power 7288 SRC 4 PF Source 4 three phase power factor 7289 SRC 4 Phase A PF Source 4 phase A power factor 7290 SRC 4 Phase B PF Source 4 phase B power factor 7291 SRC 4 Phase C PF Source 4 phase C power factor 7296 SRC 5 P Watts Source 5 three phase real power 7298 SRC 5 Pa Watts Source 5 phase A real power 7300 SRC 5 Pb Watts Source 5 phase B real power 7302 SRC 5 Pc Watts Source...

Page 578: ... Source 3 positive varhour 7462 SRC 3 Neg varh varh Source 3 negative varhour 7472 SRC 4 Pos Watthour Wh Source 4 positive Watthour 7474 SRC 4 Neg Watthour Wh Source 4 negative Watthour 7476 SRC 4 Pos varh varh Source 4 positive varhour 7478 SRC 4 Neg varh varh Source 4 negative varhour 7488 SRC 5 Pos Watthour Wh Source 5 positive Watthour 7490 SRC 5 Neg Watthour Wh Source 5 negative Watthour 7492...

Page 579: ...RC 5 Demand Watt Watts Source 5 real power demand 7752 SRC 5 Demand var Vars Source 5 reactive power demand 7754 SRC 5 Demand Va VA Source 5 apparent power demand 7760 SRC 6 Demand Ia Amps Source 6 phase A current demand 7762 SRC 6 Demand Ib Amps Source 6 phase B current demand 7764 SRC 6 Demand Ic Amps Source 6 phase C current demand 7766 SRC 6 Demand Watt Watts Source 6 real power demand 7768 SR...

Page 580: ...br Mag pu Transformer restraint phase B current magnitude 8972 Xfmr Ibr Angle Degrees Transformer restraint phase B current angle 8973 Xfmr Harm2 Ibd Mag fo Transformer differential phase B second harmonic current magnitude 8974 Xfmr Harm2 Ibd Angle Degrees Transformer differential phase B second harmonic current angle 8975 Xfmr Harm5 Ibd Mag fo Transformer differential phase B fifth harmonic curr...

Page 581: ... 9604 PMU 1 Ia Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current angle 9605 PMU 1 Ib Mag Amps Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current magnitude 9607 PMU 1 Ib Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current angle 9608 PMU 1 Ic Mag Amps Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current magnitude 9610 PMU 1 Ic Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current angle 9611 PMU 1 Ig Mag Amp...

Page 582: ...nic 10279 SRC 1 Ib Harm 7 Source 1 phase B current seventh harmonic 10280 SRC 1 Ib Harm 8 Source 1 phase B current eighth harmonic 10281 SRC 1 Ib Harm 9 Source 1 phase B current ninth harmonic 10282 SRC 1 Ib Harm 10 Source 1 phase B current tenth harmonic 10283 SRC 1 Ib Harm 11 Source 1 phase B current eleventh harmonic 10284 SRC 1 Ib Harm 12 Source 1 phase B current twelfth harmonic 10285 SRC 1 I...

Page 583: ...onic 10342 SRC 2 Ia Harm 4 Source 2 phase A current fourth harmonic 10343 SRC 2 Ia Harm 5 Source 2 phase A current fifth harmonic 10344 SRC 2 Ia Harm 6 Source 2 phase A current sixth harmonic 10345 SRC 2 Ia Harm 7 Source 2 phase A current seventh harmonic 10346 SRC 2 Ia Harm 8 Source 2 phase A current eighth harmonic 10347 SRC 2 Ia Harm 9 Source 2 phase A current ninth harmonic 10348 SRC 2 Ia Harm...

Page 584: ... 10405 SRC 2 Ic THD Source 2 phase C current total harmonic distortion 10406 SRC 2 Ic Harm 2 Source 2 phase C current second harmonic 10407 SRC 2 Ic Harm 3 Source 2 phase C current third harmonic 10408 SRC 2 Ic Harm 4 Source 2 phase C current fourth harmonic 10409 SRC 2 Ic Harm 5 Source 2 phase C current fifth harmonic 10410 SRC 2 Ic Harm 6 Source 2 phase C current sixth harmonic 10411 SRC 2 Ic Ha...

Page 585: ...RC 3 Ia Harm 23 Source 3 phase A current twenty third harmonic 10461 SRC 3 Ia Harm 24 Source 3 phase A current twenty fourth harmonic 10462 SRC 3 Ia Harm 25 Source 3 phase A current twenty fifth harmonic 10471 SRC 3 Ib THD Source 3 phase B current total harmonic distortion 10472 SRC 3 Ib Harm 2 Source 3 phase B current second harmonic 10473 SRC 3 Ib Harm 3 Source 3 phase B current third harmonic 1...

Page 586: ... SRC 3 Ic Harm 20 Source 3 phase C current twentieth harmonic 10524 SRC 3 Ic Harm 21 Source 3 phase C current twenty first harmonic 10525 SRC 3 Ic Harm 22 Source 3 phase C current twenty second harmonic 10526 SRC 3 Ic Harm 23 Source 3 phase C current twenty third harmonic 10527 SRC 3 Ic Harm 24 Source 3 phase C current twenty fourth harmonic 10528 SRC 3 Ic Harm 25 Source 3 phase C current twenty f...

Page 587: ...6 SRC 4 Ib Harm 17 Source 4 phase B current seventeenth harmonic 10587 SRC 4 Ib Harm 18 Source 4 phase B current eighteenth harmonic 10588 SRC 4 Ib Harm 19 Source 4 phase B current nineteenth harmonic 10589 SRC 4 Ib Harm 20 Source 4 phase B current twentieth harmonic 10590 SRC 4 Ib Harm 21 Source 4 phase B current twenty first harmonic 10591 SRC 4 Ib Harm 22 Source 4 phase B current twenty second ...

Page 588: ...649 SRC 5 Ia Harm 14 Source 5 phase A current fourteenth harmonic 10650 SRC 5 Ia Harm 15 Source 5 phase A current fifteenth harmonic 10651 SRC 5 Ia Harm 16 Source 5 phase A current sixteenth harmonic 10652 SRC 5 Ia Harm 17 Source 5 phase A current seventeenth harmonic 10653 SRC 5 Ia Harm 18 Source 5 phase A current eighteenth harmonic 10654 SRC 5 Ia Harm 19 Source 5 phase A current nineteenth harm...

Page 589: ...0712 SRC 5 Ic Harm 11 Source 5 phase C current eleventh harmonic 10713 SRC 5 Ic Harm 12 Source 5 phase C current twelfth harmonic 10714 SRC 5 Ic Harm 13 Source 5 phase C current thirteenth harmonic 10715 SRC 5 Ic Harm 14 Source 5 phase C current fourteenth harmonic 10716 SRC 5 Ic Harm 15 Source 5 phase C current fifteenth harmonic 10717 SRC 5 Ic Harm 16 Source 5 phase C current sixteenth harmonic ...

Page 590: ...onic 10775 SRC 6 Ib Harm 8 Source 6 phase B current eighth harmonic 10776 SRC 6 Ib Harm 9 Source 6 phase B current ninth harmonic 10777 SRC 6 Ib Harm 10 Source 6 phase B current tenth harmonic 10778 SRC 6 Ib Harm 11 Source 6 phase B current eleventh harmonic 10779 SRC 6 Ib Harm 12 Source 6 phase B current twelfth harmonic 10780 SRC 6 Ib Harm 13 Source 6 phase B current thirteenth harmonic 10781 SR...

Page 591: ... 6 phase C current twenty fifth harmonic 12306 Oscill Num Triggers Oscillography number of triggers 13504 DCmA Ip 1 mA DCmA input 1 actual value 13506 DCmA Ip 2 mA DCmA input 2 actual value 13508 DCmA Ip 3 mA DCmA input 3 actual value 13510 DCmA Ip 4 mA DCmA input 4 actual value 13512 DCmA Ip 5 mA DCmA input 5 actual value 13514 DCmA Ip 6 mA DCmA input 6 actual value 13516 DCmA Ip 7 mA DCmA input ...

Page 592: ...t 26 actual value 13578 RTD Ip 27 RTD input 27 actual value 13579 RTD Ip 28 RTD input 28 actual value 13580 RTD Ip 29 RTD input 29 actual value 13581 RTD Ip 30 RTD input 30 actual value 13582 RTD Ip 31 RTD input 31 actual value 13583 RTD Ip 32 RTD input 32 actual value 13584 RTD Ip 33 RTD input 33 actual value 13585 RTD Ip 34 RTD input 34 actual value 13586 RTD Ip 35 RTD input 35 actual value 1358...

Page 593: ... RTD input 8 actual value 34760 RRTD 9 Value C Remote RTD input 9 actual value 34761 RRTD 10 Value C Remote RTD input 10 actual value 34762 RRTD 11 Value C Remote RTD input 11 actual value 34763 RRTD 12 Value C Remote RTD input 12 actual value 39168 FlexElement 1 Value FlexElement 1 actual value 39170 FlexElement 2 Value FlexElement 2 actual value 39172 FlexElement 3 Value FlexElement 3 actual val...

Page 594: ... 61850 GOOSE analog input 16 45616 GOOSE Analog In 17 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 17 45618 GOOSE Analog In 18 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 18 45620 GOOSE Analog In 19 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 19 45622 GOOSE Analog In 20 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 20 45624 GOOSE Analog In 21 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 21 45626 GOOSE Analog In 22 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 22 45628 GOOSE Analog In 23 IEC ...

Page 595: ...teger input 8 9984 GOOSE UInt Input 9 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 9 9986 GOOSE UInt Input 10 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 10 9988 GOOSE UInt Input 11 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 11 9990 GOOSE UInt Input 12 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 12 9992 GOOSE UInt Input 13 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 13 9994 GOOSE UInt Input 14 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 14 9996 GOOSE UInt Input 15 IEC61850 GOOSE ...

Page 596: ...A 28 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin A 1 PARAMETER LISTS APPENDIX A A ...

Page 597: ...ace in packets that are groups of asynchronously framed byte data The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet The following information describes the general for mat for both transmit and receive packets For details on packet formatting see subsequent sections describing each func tion code SLAVE ADDRESS This is the address of the slave device that is intended t...

Page 598: ...otocol Identifier Used for intra system multiplexing The Modbus protocol is identified by the value 0 Length The length field is a byte count of the following fields including the Unit Identifier and data fields Unit Identifier For the purposes of the UR this field is equivalent to the Modbus RTU SLAVE ADDRESS field The client must use the same value here as programmed in the UR setting MODBUS SLA...

Page 599: ...l number of data bytes Di i th data byte i 0 to N 1 G 16 bit characteristic polynomial 1010000000000001 binary with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shr x right shift operator th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag a 0 is shifted into the MSbit of x all other bits are shifted right one location ALGORITHM 1 FFFF hex A 2 0 i 3 0 j 4 Di Alow Alow 5 j 1 j 6 shr A 7 Is there a carry No go to 8 ...

Page 600: ...ore identical The following table shows the format of the master and slave packetsin Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h 17 decimal the slave device responds with the values 40 300 and 0 from registers 4050h 4051h and 40...

Page 601: ...0 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h 17 dec Table B 5 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 05 FUNCTION CODE 05 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE low 01 OPERATION CODE low 01 CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE high F...

Page 602: ...the function code set to 1 The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11h Table B 8 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET ...

Page 603: ...pecific file transfer information so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections b OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols for example TFTP or MMS c COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE ...

Page 604: ... following to the filename before writing it To read from a specific time to the end of the log space startTime To read a specific range of records space startTime space endTime Replace startTime and endTime with the number of seconds since Jan 1 1970 as numeric text f READING EVENT RECORDER FILES To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format the only available format use the followin...

Page 605: ... Supplier Serial Number F203 none 00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number 8 items F203 none Product Information Read Only Written by Factory 0110 FPGA Version F206 none 0113 FPGA Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 Product Information Read Write 0120 Undefined 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Self Test Targets Read Only 0200 Self Test States 4 items 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0 Front Panel Read Only 0208 LED Column n State...

Page 606: ...28 Virtual Input 41 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0429 Virtual Input 42 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042A Virtual Input 43 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042B Virtual Input 44 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042C Virtual Input 45 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042D Virtual Input 46 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042E Virtual Input 47 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042F Virtual Input 48 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0430 Virtual Input...

Page 607: ... Input 23 05E0 Repeated for Binary Input 24 05E4 Repeated for Binary Input 25 05E8 Repeated for Binary Input 26 05EC Repeated for Binary Input 27 05F0 Repeated for Binary Input 28 05F4 Repeated for Binary Input 29 05F8 Repeated for Binary Input 30 05FC Repeated for Binary Input 31 0600 Repeated for Binary Input 32 0604 Repeated for Binary Input 33 0608 Repeated for Binary Input 34 060C Repeated fo...

Page 608: ...Repeated for Binary Input 81 06C8 Repeated for Binary Input 82 06CC Repeated for Binary Input 83 06D0 Repeated for Binary Input 84 06D4 Repeated for Binary Input 85 06D8 Repeated for Binary Input 86 06DC Repeated for Binary Input 87 06E0 Repeated for Binary Input 88 06E4 Repeated for Binary Input 89 06E8 Repeated for Binary Input 90 06EC Repeated for Binary Input 91 06F0 Repeated for Binary Input ...

Page 609: ...g Factor 9 0 to 65 535 0 001 F001 1000 0722 IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 9 32768 to 32767 1 F002 0 0723 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 2 0742 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 3 0761 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 4 IEC 103 Commands Read Write Setting 32 modules 0780 IEC103 Command 1 FUN 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0781 IEC103 Command 1 INF 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0782 IEC103 Command 1 Param ON 0 to 64 1 F631 0 OFF 0783 IEC103 Command...

Page 610: ... 256 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Only 14E0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 14E1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Write 14E2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Only 14E3 Target Message F200 Contact Input Output States Read Only 1500 Contact Input States 6 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1508 Virtual Input States 8 items 0 to 65535 1 F5...

Page 611: ...0B Field Latching Output Physical States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160C Field Unit Online Offline States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160D Field RTD Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160E Field Transducer Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 Ethernet Fibre Channel Status Read Only 1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134 0 Fail 1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134...

Page 612: ...F060 0 1816 Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1818 Source 1 Ground Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1819 Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 181B Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 181C Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 181E Source 1 Positive Seque...

Page 613: ...r Source 3 1AC0 Repeated for Source 4 1B00 Repeated for Source 5 1B40 Repeated for Source 6 Source Power Read Only 6 modules 1C00 Source 1 Three Phase Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C02 Source 1 Phase A Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C04 Source 1 Phase B Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C06 Source 1 Phase C Real Power 1...

Page 614: ...F060 0 1E08 Source 1 Demand Var 0 to 999999 999 var 0 001 F060 0 1E0A Source 1 Demand Va 0 to 999999 999 VA 0 001 F060 0 1E0C Reserved 4 items F001 0 1E10 Repeated for Source 2 1E20 Repeated for Source 3 1E30 Repeated for Source 4 1E40 Repeated for Source 5 1E50 Repeated for Source 6 Source Demand Peaks Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 1E80 Source 1 Demand Ia Maximum 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0...

Page 615: ...ing Time Phase B 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 Breaker Arcing Current Actual Values Read Only Non Volatile 4 modules 21E8 Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase C 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 21E9 Breaker 1 Operating Time 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 21EA Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actual Values Read Only Non Volatile 4 modules 21EE Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actual Values R...

Page 616: ...al Inputs Actual Values Read Only Non Volatile 2335 Transformer Loss of Life 0 to 500000 Hours 1 F060 0 Synchrocheck Actual Values Read Only 4 modules 2400 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 V 1 F060 0 2402 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency 0 to 655 35 Hz 0 01 F001 0 2403 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase 0 to 180 not 0 to 359 9 degrees 0 1 F001 0 2404 Repeated for Synchrocheck 2 24...

Page 617: ...ead Only 2699 PMU 1 SOC Timestamp 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F003 0 269B PMU 1 FRAMESEC Timestamp 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F003 0 269D PMU 1 STAT Flags 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 Phasor Measurement Unit Aggregator Actual Values Read Only 26BD PMU 1 Aggregator PDU Size F001 0 IEC 61850 GGIO5 Configuration Read Write Setting Registers 16 modules 26D0 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 1 Operand F612 0 26D...

Page 618: ...er register 96 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 2D80 Contact Output States one per register 64 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 2E00 Virtual Output States one per register 96 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off Expanded Remote Input Output Status Read Only 2F00 Remote Device States one per register 32 items 0 to 1 1 F155 0 Offline 2F80 Remote Input States one per register 64 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off Oscillography Values...

Page 619: ...rite Setting 32BF Operator Alphanumeric Password Setting F202 none Security Read Only 32C9 Operator Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Security Read Write 32CA Operator Alphanumeric Password Entry F202 none Security Read Write Setting 32D4 Observer Alphanumeric Password Setting F202 none Security Read Only 32DE Observer Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Secur...

Page 620: ... DCmA Inputs 8 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34D0 DCmA Inputs 9 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34D2 DCmA Inputs 10 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34D4 DCmA Inputs 11 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34D6 DCmA Inputs 12 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34D8 DCmA Inputs 13 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34DA DCmA Inputs 14 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999...

Page 621: ... to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3514 RTD Input 37 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3515 RTD Input 38 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3516 RTD Input 39 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3517 RTD Input 40 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3518 RTD Input 41 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3519 RTD Input 42 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 351A RTD Input 43 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 351B RTD Input 44 Value 32768...

Page 622: ...5 U1 3806 Field Unit 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 3807 Field Unit 1 Type 0 to 3 1 F243 0 CC 05 3808 Field Unit 1 Serial Number 1 to1 1 F205 000000000000 380E Field Unit 1 Port 1 to 4 1 F001 1 380F Repeated for Field Unit 2 381E Repeated for Filed Unit 3 382D Repeated for Filed Unit 4 383C Repeated for Filed Unit 5 384B Repeated for Filed Unit 6 385A Repeated for Filed Unit 7 3869 Repeated f...

Page 623: ...ct Input 4 392C Repeated for Field Contact Input 5 3937 Repeated for Field Contact Input 6 3942 Repeated for Field Contact Input 7 394D Repeated for Field Contact Input 8 3958 Repeated for Field Contact Input9 3963 Repeated for Field Contact Input 10 396E Repeated for Field Contact Input 11 3979 Repeated for Field Contact Input 12 3984 Repeated for Field Contact Input 13 398F Repeated for Field Co...

Page 624: ...ems F205 FCO U OUT 3BB4 Field Output 1 Operate 6 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 3BC0 Field Output 1 Seal In 6 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 3BCC Field Output 1 Events 6 items 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 3BD2 Repeated for Field Contact Output 2 3C14 Repeated for Field Contact Output 3 3C56 Repeated for Field Contact Output 4 3C98 Repeated for Field Contact Output 5 3CDA Repeated for Field Contact Outp...

Page 625: ... for Field Unit RTD 3 3F18 Repeated for Field Unit RTD 4 3F20 Repeated for Field Unit RTD 5 3F28 Repeated for Field Unit RTD 6 3F30 Repeated for Field Unit RTD 7 3F38 Repeated for Field Unit RTD 8 Field Unit Transducers Read Write Setting 8 modules 3F40 Field Unit Transducer 1 Name 0 to 1 1 F205 TRD 1 3F46 Field Unit Transducer 1 Origin 0 to 24 1 F253 0 None 3F47 Field Unit Transducer 1 Range 0 to...

Page 626: ...4967295 1 F300 0 LED Test Read Write Setting 4048 LED Test Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4049 LED Test Control 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Preferences Read Write Setting 404F Language 0 to 5 1 F531 0 English 4050 Flash Message Time 0 5 to 10 s 0 1 F001 10 4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300 4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 1 F101 0 25 4053 Screen Saver Feature 0 to 1 1 F102 0...

Page 627: ...d 0 to 100000000 1 F003 30000 40BC DNP Power Factor Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 1 F003 30000 40BE DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 1 F003 30000 40C0 DNP IIN Time Synchronization Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440 40C1 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 1 F001 240 40C2 DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 40C4 DNP Client Address 4 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 40C6 DNP Client ...

Page 628: ...1 2 4162 IEC Available TCP IP Connections 0 to 2 1 F001 2 4163 MMS Available TCP IP Connections 0 to 5 1 F001 5 4164 PMU Available TCP IP Connections 0 to 4 1 F001 4 Simple Network Time Protocol Read Write Setting 4168 Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4169 Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Server IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 416B Simple Network Time Protoc...

Page 629: ...rammable LED 4 42CC Repeated for User Programmable LED 5 42CF Repeated for User Programmable LED 6 42D2 Repeated for User Programmable LED 7 42D5 Repeated for User Programmable LED 8 42D8 Repeated for User Programmable LED 9 42DB Repeated for User Programmable LED 10 42DE Repeated for User Programmable LED 11 42E1 Repeated for User Programmable LED 12 42E4 Repeated for User Programmable LED 13 42E...

Page 630: ...Setting 43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 1 F133 0 Not Programmed 43E1 Relay Name F202 Relay 1 User Programmable Self Tests Read Write Setting 4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4442 User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4443 User Programmable Remote Device Off Function 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4444 User Programmable First Ether...

Page 631: ...sformer Number of Windings 2 to 6 1 F001 2 4631 Transformer Phase Compensation 0 to 1 1 F160 0 Internal software 4632 Transformer Load Loss at Rated Load 1 to 20000 kW 1 F001 100 4633 Transformer Rated Winding Temperature Rise 0 to 4 1 F161 1 65 C oil 4634 Transformer No Load Loss 1 to 20000 kW 1 F001 10 4635 Transformer Type of Cooling 0 to 6 1 F162 0 OA 4636 Transformer Top oil Rise Over Ambient...

Page 632: ...Disabled 47F4 Reserved 0 to 65535 s 1 F001 0 47F5 Repeated for Breaker 2 481A Repeated for Breaker 3 483F Repeated for Breaker 4 4864 Repeated for Breaker 5 4889 Repeated for Breaker 6 Demand Read Write Setting 490A Demand Current Method 0 to 2 1 F139 0 Thermal Exponential 490B Demand Power Method 0 to 2 1 F139 0 Thermal Exponential 490C Demand Interval 0 to 5 1 F132 2 15 MIN 490D Demand Input 0 t...

Page 633: ...V 0 001 F002 0 4E19 Raw Field Data DC2 0 to 0 001 V 0 001 F002 0 4E1A Raw Field Data DC3 0 to 0 001 V 0 001 F002 0 4E1B Raw Field Data FCI States 2 items 0 to 1 1 F500 0 4E1D Raw Field Data SI States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 4E1E Raw Field Data SI Test States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 4E1F Raw Field Data Brick ADC Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0 4E20 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F0...

Page 634: ...t 25 55F4 Repeated for RTD Input 26 5608 Repeated for RTD Input 27 561C Repeated for RTD Input 28 5630 Repeated for RTD Input 29 5644 Repeated for RTD Input 30 5658 Repeated for RTD Input 31 566C Repeated for RTD Input 32 5680 Repeated for RTD Input 33 5694 Repeated for RTD Input 34 56A8 Repeated for RTD Input 35 56BC Repeated for RTD Input 36 56D0 Repeated for RTD Input 37 56E4 Repeated for RTD I...

Page 635: ...te Grouped Setting 6 modules 5900 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5901 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 5902 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Input 0 to 1 1 F122 0 Phasor 5903 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1000 5904 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 1 F103 0 IEEE Mod Inv 5905 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 0 ...

Page 636: ...utral Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5B0A Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5B0B Reserved 6 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5B11 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 2 5B22 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 3 5B33 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 4 5B44 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 5 5B55 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 6 Neutral Instan...

Page 637: ...600 s 0 01 F001 0 5DA5 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 5DA7 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5DA8 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5DA9 Reserved 8 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5DB1 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 5DC2 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 5DD3 Repeated for Gro...

Page 638: ...former Aging Factor Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6155 Transformer Aging Factor Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6156 Transformer Aging Factor Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Transformer Loss of Life Read Write Grouped Setting 6160 Transformer Loss of Life Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6161 XFMR LOL Initial Value 0 to 500000 hrs 1 F003 0 6163 Transformer Loss of Life Pickup 0 to 500000 hrs 1...

Page 639: ...4294967295 1 F300 0 6473 Overfrequency 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 6474 Overfrequency 1 Pickup 20 to 65 Hz 0 01 F001 6050 6475 Overfrequency 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 500 6476 Overfrequency 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 500 6477 Overfrequency 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6478 Overfrequency 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6479 Reserved 4 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 647D...

Page 640: ... 30 66C5 Load Encroachment Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 66C6 Load Encroachment Reset Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 66C7 Load Encroachment Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 66C9 Load Encroachment Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 66CA Load Encroachment Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 66CB Reserved 6 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Phase Undervoltage Read Write Grouped Setting 3 modules 7000 Ph...

Page 641: ...erved 10 items F001 0 7091 Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 2 70B2 Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 3 70D3 Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 4 70F4 Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 5 Ground Distance Read Write Grouped Setting 5 modules 7130 Ground Distance Zone 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7131 Ground Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision 0 05 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 200 7132 Ground Distance Zone ...

Page 642: ...Pickup 0 006 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 50 7236 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7237 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup 0 006 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 50 7238 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7239 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 723B Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1...

Page 643: ...5F5 Repeated for Disconnect Switch 12 7614 Repeated for Disconnect Switch 13 7633 Repeated for Disconnect Switch 14 7652 Repeated for Disconnect Switch 15 7671 Repeated for Disconnect Switch 16 7690 Repeated for Disconnect Switch 17 76AF Repeated for Disconnect Switch 18 76CE Repeated for Disconnect Switch 19 76ED Repeated for Disconnect Switch 20 770C Repeated for Disconnect Switch 21 772B Repeat...

Page 644: ... Magnitude 0 to 9 999 kA 0 001 F004 1000 78C0 PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Angle 180 to 180 0 05 F002 13000 78C1 PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Magnitude 0 to 9 999 kA 0 001 F003 1000 78C3 PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Angle 180 to 180 0 05 F002 11000 78C4 PMU 1 Ground Current Test Magnitude 0 to 9 999 kA 0 001 F004 0 78C6 PMU 1 Ground Current Test Angle 180 to 180 0 05 F002 0 78C7 PMU 1 Test Frequency 20 ...

Page 645: ...r Programmable Pushbutton 11 7D70 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 12 7DA0 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 13 7DD0 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 14 7E00 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 15 7E30 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 16 Distance Read Write Grouped Setting 7E8C Distance Signal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7E8D Memory Duration 5 to 25 cycles...

Page 646: ...gnal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7F02 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 300 7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled ...

Page 647: ...y 2 modules 83F0 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 83F1 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time 0 to 4294967295 F003 0 83F3 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 83F4 Repeated for EGD Slow Producer Exchange 2 EGD Fast Production Read Write Setting 8400 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8401 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 D...

Page 648: ...87 Repeated for Breaker Failure 4 86B4 Repeated for Breaker Failure 5 86E1 Repeated for Breaker Failure 6 Remote RTD Inputs Read Only Actual Values 12 modules 87C0 Remote RTD 1 Value 0 to 200 C 1 F002 0 87C1 Remote RTD 2 Value 0 to 200 C 1 F002 0 87C2 Remote RTD 3 Value 0 to 200 C 1 F002 0 87C3 Remote RTD 4 Value 0 to 200 C 1 F002 0 87C4 Remote RTD 5 Value 0 to 200 C 1 F002 0 87C5 Remote RTD 6 Val...

Page 649: ... Repeated for Digital Element 32 8CC0 Repeated for Digital Element 33 8CD6 Repeated for Digital Element 34 8CEC Repeated for Digital Element 35 8D02 Repeated for Digital Element 36 8D18 Repeated for Digital Element 37 8D2E Repeated for Digital Element 38 8D44 Repeated for Digital Element 39 8D5A Repeated for Digital Element 40 8D70 Repeated for Digital Element 41 8D86 Repeated for Digital Element ...

Page 650: ...ent 2 902A Repeated for FlexElement 3 903F Repeated for FlexElement 4 9054 Repeated for FlexElement 5 9069 Repeated for FlexElement 6 907E Repeated for FlexElement 7 9093 Repeated for FlexElement 8 90A8 Repeated for FlexElement 9 90BD Repeated for FlexElement 10 90D2 Repeated for FlexElement 11 90E7 Repeated for FlexElement 12 90FC Repeated for FlexElement 13 9111 Repeated for FlexElement 14 9126 ...

Page 651: ... Repeated for DCmA Output 12 93A8 Repeated for DCmA Output 13 93AE Repeated for DCmA Output 14 93B4 Repeated for DCmA Output 15 93BA Repeated for DCmA Output 16 93C0 Repeated for DCmA Output 17 93C6 Repeated for DCmA Output 18 93CC Repeated for DCmA Output 19 93D2 Repeated for DCmA Output 20 93D8 Repeated for DCmA Output 21 93DE Repeated for DCmA Output 22 93E4 Repeated for DCmA Output 23 93EA Rep...

Page 652: ...for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 9 98BB Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 10 98BE Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 11 98C1 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 12 98C4 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 13 98C7 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 14 98CA Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 15 98CD Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 16 FlexElement Actual Values Read Only 16 modules 9900 Fle...

Page 653: ...ates 16 items 0 to 3 1 F086 0 Off 9A10 Teleprotection Input 2 n Default States 16 items 0 to 3 1 F086 0 Off 9A20 Teleprotection Output 1 n Operand 16 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 9A40 Teleprotection Output 2 n Operand 16 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Teleprotection Channel Tests Read Only 9AA0 Teleprotection Channel 1 Status 0 to 2 1 F134 1 OK 9AA1 Teleprotection Channel 1 Number of Lost Packet...

Page 654: ...nter 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A30C Digital Counter 1 Up 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A30E Digital Counter 1 Down 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A311 Digital Counter 1 Preset 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 F004 0 A313 Digital Counter 1 Compare 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 F004 0 A315 Digital Counter 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A317 Digital Counter 1 Freeze Reset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A319 Digital C...

Page 655: ...C Repeated for Non Volatile Latch 14 A7A8 Repeated for Non Volatile Latch 15 A7B4 Repeated for Non Volatile Latch 16 Frequency Rate of Change Read Write Setting 4 modules A900 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A901 Frequency Rate of Change 1 OC Supervision 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 200 A902 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Min 20 to 80 Hz 0 01 F001 4500 A903 Frequency Rate of Chan...

Page 656: ...d for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 11 AA4D Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 12 AA54 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 13 AA5B Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 14 AA62 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 15 AA69 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 16 AA70 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 17 AA77 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 18 AA7E Repeate...

Page 657: ... IEC 61850 Logical Node CSWIx Name Prefix 30 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AE5A IEC 61850 Logical Node XSWIx Name Prefix 24 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none IEC 61850 GGIO4 General Analog Configuration Settings Read Write AF00 Number of Analog Input Points in GGIO4 4 to 32 4 F001 4 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input Points Configuration Settings Read Write Setting 32 modules AF10 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input...

Page 658: ...ta 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled B0B6 IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled B0B7 IEC 61850 LPHD Latitude 90 to 90 degrees 0 001 F004 0 B0B9 IEC 61850 LPHD DC PhyNam Longitude 180 to 180 degrees 0 001 F004 0 B9BB IEC 61850 LPHD DC PhyNam Altitude 0 to 10000 m 1 F003 0 B0BD Reserved 3 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands Read Write Setting 6 modules B0C0 IEC 61850 MMX...

Page 659: ...220 Repeated for Received Analog 9 B222 Repeated for Received Analog 10 B224 Repeated for Received Analog 11 B226 Repeated for Received Analog 12 B228 Repeated for Received Analog 13 B22A Repeated for Received Analog 14 B22C Repeated for Received Analog 15 B22E Repeated for Received Analog 16 B230 Repeated for Received Analog 17 B232 Repeated for Received Analog 18 B234 Repeated for Received Analo...

Page 660: ... 8 modules B5A0 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function GoEna 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled B5A1 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID F209 GOOSEOut_x_ B5C2 Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address F072 0 B5C5 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 1 F001 4 B5C6 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 1 F001 0 B5C7 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 1 F001 0 B5C8 IE...

Page 661: ...tact Input 13 BB68 Repeated for Contact Input 14 BB70 Repeated for Contact Input 15 BB78 Repeated for Contact Input 16 BB80 Repeated for Contact Input 17 BB88 Repeated for Contact Input 18 BB90 Repeated for Contact Input 19 BB98 Repeated for Contact Input 20 BBA0 Repeated for Contact Input 21 BBA8 Repeated for Contact Input 22 BBB0 Repeated for Contact Input 23 BBB8 Repeated for Contact Input 24 B...

Page 662: ...nput 67 BD18 Repeated for Contact Input 68 BD20 Repeated for Contact Input 69 BD28 Repeated for Contact Input 70 BD30 Repeated for Contact Input 71 BD38 Repeated for Contact Input 72 BD40 Repeated for Contact Input 73 BD48 Repeated for Contact Input 74 BD50 Repeated for Contact Input 75 BD58 Repeated for Contact Input 76 BD60 Repeated for Contact Input 77 BD68 Repeated for Contact Input 78 BD70 Re...

Page 663: ...al Input 16 BEF0 Repeated for Virtual Input 17 BEFC Repeated for Virtual Input 18 BF08 Repeated for Virtual Input 19 BF14 Repeated for Virtual Input 20 BF20 Repeated for Virtual Input 21 BF2C Repeated for Virtual Input 22 BF38 Repeated for Virtual Input 23 BF44 Repeated for Virtual Input 24 BF50 Repeated for Virtual Input 25 BF5C Repeated for Virtual Input 26 BF68 Repeated for Virtual Input 27 BF7...

Page 664: ...ed for Virtual Output 5 C158 Repeated for Virtual Output 6 C160 Repeated for Virtual Output 7 C168 Repeated for Virtual Output 8 C170 Repeated for Virtual Output 9 C178 Repeated for Virtual Output 10 C180 Repeated for Virtual Output 11 C188 Repeated for Virtual Output 12 C190 Repeated for Virtual Output 13 C198 Repeated for Virtual Output 14 C1A0 Repeated for Virtual Output 15 C1A8 Repeated for Vi...

Page 665: ... for Virtual Output 59 C308 Repeated for Virtual Output 60 C310 Repeated for Virtual Output 61 C318 Repeated for Virtual Output 62 C320 Repeated for Virtual Output 63 C328 Repeated for Virtual Output 64 C330 Repeated for Virtual Output 65 C338 Repeated for Virtual Output 66 C340 Repeated for Virtual Output 67 C348 Repeated for Virtual Output 68 C350 Repeated for Virtual Output 69 C358 Repeated for...

Page 666: ... 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C45A Clear Breaker 1 Arcing Current Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C45C Clear Breaker 2 Arcing Current Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C45E Clear Breaker 3 Arcing Current Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C460 Clear Breaker 4 Arcing Current Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C468 Clear Energy Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C46C Clear Unauthorized Access Operand 0 to 429...

Page 667: ...ate 96 items 0 to 2 1 F144 0 Disabled C800 Force Contact Output x State 64 items 0 to 3 1 F131 0 Disabled Direct Inputs Outputs Read Write Setting C880 Direct Device ID 1 to 16 1 F001 1 C881 Direct I O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C882 Platform Direct I O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64 C883 Direct I O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C884 Pl...

Page 668: ...t Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CADB Direct Input Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CADC Reserved 4 items 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CAE0 Direct Input Output Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAE1 Direct Input Output Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 1 F001 600 CAE2 Direct Input Output Ch 1 Unreturned M...

Page 669: ...FF0 Repeated for Remote Input 9 CFFA Repeated for Remote Input 10 D004 Repeated for Remote Input 11 D00E Repeated for Remote Input 12 D018 Repeated for Remote Input 13 D022 Repeated for Remote Input 14 D02C Repeated for Remote Input 15 D036 Repeated for Remote Input 16 D040 Repeated for Remote Input 17 D04A Repeated for Remote Input 18 D054 Repeated for Remote Input 19 D05E Repeated for Remote Inp...

Page 670: ...eated for Remote Output 28 D290 Repeated for Remote Output 29 D294 Repeated for Remote Output 30 D298 Repeated for Remote Output 31 D29C Repeated for Remote Output 32 Remote Output UserSt Pairs Read Write Setting 32 modules D2A0 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 D2A2 Remote Output UserSt 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled D2A3 Reserved 0 to 1 1 F001 0 D2A4 Repeated for Remote ...

Page 671: ...1 D330 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO17 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D331 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO18 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D332 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO19 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D333 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO20 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D334 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO21 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D335 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO22 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D336 IEC 61850 GGIO2...

Page 672: ... GGIO2 CF SPCSO62 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35E IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO63 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35F IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO64 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 Remote Device Status Read Only 16 modules D360 Remote Device 1 StNum 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 D362 Remote Device 1 SqNum 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 D364 Repeated for Remote Device 2 D368 Repeated for Remote Device 3 D36C Repeat...

Page 673: ...for Contact Output 31 D5B1 Repeated for Contact Output 32 D5C0 Repeated for Contact Output 33 D5CF Repeated for Contact Output 34 D5DE Repeated for Contact Output 35 D5ED Repeated for Contact Output 36 D5FC Repeated for Contact Output 37 D60B Repeated for Contact Output 38 D61A Repeated for Contact Output 39 D629 Repeated for Contact Output 40 D638 Repeated for Contact Output 41 D647 Repeated for ...

Page 674: ...ted for DCmA Inputs 20 D91C Repeated for DCmA Inputs 21 D92F Repeated for DCmA Inputs 22 D942 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 23 D955 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 24 DNP IEC Points Read Write Setting D968 DNP IEC 60870 5 104 Binary Input Points 256 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 DB68 DNP IEC 60870 5 104 Analog Input Points 256 items 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 Synchrocheck Read Write Setting 4 modules DC70 Synchroch...

Page 675: ...4 1 F001 102 E8CE PMU Aggregator 1 PDC Network Control 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled E8CF Aggregator 1 Include PMU1 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D0 Aggregator 1 Include PMU2 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D1 Aggregator 1 Include PMU3 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D2 Aggregator 1 Include PMU4 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D3 Aggregator 1 Include PMU5 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D4 Aggregator 1 Include PMU6 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No E8D5 PMU Aggregator ...

Page 676: ...ency Trigger Read Write Setting EAEC PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled EAED PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Low Frequency 20 to 70 Hz 0 01 F001 4900 EAEE PMU 1 Frequency Trigger High Frequency 20 to 70 Hz 0 01 F001 6100 EAEF PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Pickup Time 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 10 EAF0 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Dropout Time 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 EAF1 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Blo...

Page 677: ...0 1 F002 1000 EBEA PMU 1 Ig Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 EBEB PMU 1 Ig Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBEC PMU 1 Sequence Voltage Shift Angle 180 to 180 30 F002 0 EBED PMU 1 Sequence Current Shift Angle 180 to 180 30 F002 0 Phasor Measurement Unit Network Reporting Configuration Read Write Setting EC48 PMU Network Reporting Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled EC49 PMU Network ...

Page 678: ...alues indicate leading F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00 00 00 January 1 1970 F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format alternate format for F050 First 16 bits are Month Day MM DD xxxx Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Day 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year xx xx YYYY 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1 F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR for...

Page 679: ...NPUT SIGNAL TYPE 0 Phasor 1 RMS F123 ENUMERATION CT SECONDARY 0 1 A 1 5 A F124 ENUMERATION LIST OF ELEMENTS Bitmask Curve shape Bitmask Curve shape 0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse 1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv 2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t 3 IEC Curve A 12 Definite Time 4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve A 5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve B 6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve C 7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve D 8 IAC Very Inv Bitm...

Page 680: ...86 Restricted Ground Fault 1 87 Restricted Ground Fault 2 88 Restricted Ground Fault 3 89 Restricted Ground Fault 4 90 Restricted Ground Fault 5 91 Restricted Ground Fault 6 120 Negative Sequence Overvoltage 1 140 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 141 Auxiliary Undervoltage 2 142 Auxiliary Undervoltage 3 144 Phase Undervoltage 1 145 Phase Undervoltage 2 Bitmask Element 146 Phase Undervoltage 3 148 Auxiliar...

Page 681: ...on volatile Latch 3 423 Non volatile Latch 4 424 Non volatile Latch 5 Bitmask Element 425 Non volatile Latch 6 426 Non volatile Latch 7 427 Non volatile Latch 8 428 Non volatile Latch 9 429 Non volatile Latch 10 430 Non volatile Latch 11 431 Non volatile Latch 12 432 Non volatile Latch 13 433 Non volatile Latch 14 434 Non volatile Latch 15 435 Non volatile Latch 16 530 Frequency Rate of Change 1 5...

Page 682: ... 21 870 RTD Input 22 871 RTD Input 23 Bitmask Element 872 RTD Input 24 873 RTD Input 25 874 RTD Input 26 875 RTD Input 27 876 RTD Input 28 877 RTD Input 29 878 RTD Input 30 879 RTD Input 31 880 RTD Input 32 881 RTD Input 33 882 RTD Input 34 883 RTD Input 35 884 RTD Input 36 885 RTD Input 37 886 RTD Input 38 887 RTD Input 39 888 RTD Input 40 889 RTD Input 41 890 RTD Input 42 891 RTD Input 43 892 RT...

Page 683: ...ect switch 16 936 Disconnect switch 17 937 Disconnect switch 18 938 Disconnect switch 19 939 Disconnect switch 20 940 Disconnect switch 21 941 Disconnect switch 22 942 Disconnect switch 23 943 Disconnect switch 24 968 Breaker 1 969 Breaker 2 970 Breaker 3 971 Breaker 4 980 Breaker restrike 1 981 Breaker restrike 2 982 Breaker restrike 3 991 Remote RTD Input 1 992 Remote RTD Input 2 993 Remote RTD ...

Page 684: ...re 07 81 Module Failure 08 82 Module Failure 09 83 Incompatible H W 84 Module Failure 10 85 Module Failure 11 86 Module Failure 12 87 High ENET Traffic 89 Relay Restart 90 FGM Failure 91 FGM Failure 92 FGM Failure 93 FGM Failure 94 FGM Failure 95 FGM Error 96 Maintenance Alert 97 PHY Monitor 98 Storage Media Alarm 99 Wrong Transceiver 100 Power Supply Warning Bitmask Error Bitmask Definition 0 Eve...

Page 685: ...b 5 Vbc 6 Vca F167 ENUMERATION SIGNAL SOURCE 0 SRC 1 1 SRC 2 2 SRC 3 3 SRC 4 4 SRC 5 5 SRC 6 F168 ENUMERATION INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 Disabled 1 Adapt 2nd 2 Trad 2nd Bitmask Type Bitmask Type Bitmask Type 0 None 5 Dy9 10 Yd7 1 Dy1 6 Dy11 11 Yd9 2 Dy3 7 Yd1 12 Yd11 3 Dy5 8 Yd3 4 Dy7 9 Yd5 Bitmask Value Bitmask Value 0 None 35 UserSt 3 1 DNA 1 36 UserSt 4 2 DNA 2 37 UserSt 5 3 DNA 3 38 UserSt 6 4 ...

Page 686: ...TION MEASUREMENT MODE 0 Phase to Ground 1 Phase to Phase F189 ENUMERATION INRUSH INHIBIT MODE 0 Per Phase 1 2 out of 3 2 Average Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot 0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U 1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V 2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W 3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X Bitmask DCmA input output range 0 0 to 1 mA 1 0 to 1 mA 2 1 to 1 mA 3 0 to 5 mA 4 0 to 10 mA 5 0 to 20 mA 6 4 to 20 mA Bitmask Synchrocheck dead ...

Page 687: ...ITY F224 ENUMERATION RATE TREND FOR FREQ RATE OF CHANGE 0 Increasing 1 Decreasing 2 BidirectionalF230 ENUMERATION DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING 0 Voltage 1 Current 2 Dual 3 Dual V 4 Dual I F231 ENUMERATION POLARIZING VOLTAGE 0 Calculated V0 1 Measured VX Bitmask Keypress Bitmask Keypress 0 No key use between real keys 23 Reset 24 User 1 1 1 25 User 2 2 2 26 User 3 3 3 27 User programmable key 1 4 4 28 Us...

Page 688: ... f 297 MMXU2 MX TotPF mag f 298 MMXU2 MX Hz mag f 299 MMXU2 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 300 MMXU2 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 301 MMXU2 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 302 MMXU2 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 303 MMXU2 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 304 MMXU2 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 305 MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 306 MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 307 MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 308 MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 309 MMXU2 MX P...

Page 689: ... MX VA phsB cVal mag f 401 MMXU4 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 402 MMXU4 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 403 MMXU4 MX PF phsB cVal mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 404 MMXU4 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 405 MMXU5 MX TotW mag f 406 MMXU5 MX TotVAr mag f 407 MMXU5 MX TotVA mag f 408 MMXU5 MX TotPF mag f 409 MMXU5 MX Hz mag f 410 MMXU5 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 411 MMXU5 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 412 MMXU5 MX PPV phsBC cVal...

Page 690: ...ag f 498 GGIO4 MX AnIn20 mag f 499 GGIO4 MX AnIn21 mag f 500 GGIO4 MX AnIn22 mag f 501 GGIO4 MX AnIn23 mag f 502 GGIO4 MX AnIn24 mag f 503 GGIO4 MX AnIn25 mag f 504 GGIO4 MX AnIn26 mag f 505 GGIO4 MX AnIn27 mag f 506 GGIO4 MX AnIn28 mag f 507 GGIO4 MX AnIn29 mag f 508 GGIO4 MX AnIn30 mag f 509 GGIO4 MX AnIn31 mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 510 GGIO4 MX AnIn32 mag f 511 GGIO5 ST UIntIn1 q 51...

Page 691: ...O3 ST IndPos2 stVal 163 GGIO3 ST IndPos3 stVal 164 GGIO3 ST IndPos4 stVal 165 GGIO3 ST IndPos5 stVal 166 GGIO3 ST UIntIn1 q 167 GGIO3 ST UIntIn1 stVal 168 GGIO3 ST UIntIn2 q 169 GGIO3 ST UIntIn2 stVal 170 GGIO3 ST UIntIn3 q 171 GGIO3 ST UIntIn3 stVal 172 GGIO3 ST UIntIn4 q 173 GGIO3 ST UIntIn4 stVal 174 GGIO3 ST UIntIn5 q 175 GGIO3 ST UIntIn5 stVal 176 GGIO3 ST UIntIn6 q 177 GGIO3 ST UIntIn6 stVal...

Page 692: ...TRANSDUCER ORIGIN F256 ENUMERATION BRICK ORIGIN DESTINATION 3 Fourth 4 Last Value Instance 0 Disabled 1 Isolated 2 Forcible Value Description 0 5 5V 1 1 1mA 2 0 1mA 3 0 1mA 4 0 5mA 5 0 10mA 6 0 20mA 7 4 20mA 8 potentiometer 9 tap position Value Description 0 None 1 U1 AC1 3 2 U1 AC5 7 3 U2 AC1 3 4 U2 AC5 7 5 U3 AC1 3 Value Instance 6 U3 AC5 7 7 U4 AC1 3 8 U4 AC5 7 9 U5 AC1 3 10 U5 AC5 7 11 U6 AC1 ...

Page 693: ...UTS VOLTAGE DETECTED 1 to 64 11 CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED 1 to 64 12 CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED 1 to 64 13 CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED 1 to 64 14 REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32 16 DIRECT INPUTS 1 to 96 18 REMOTE OUTPUT DNA BIT PAIRS 1 to 32 20 REMOTE OUTPUT UserSt BIT PAIRS 1 to 32 22 REMOTE DEVICE ONLINE 1 to 16 24 MISCELLANEOUS EQUATION 26 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS 28 INSERT via key...

Page 694: ...0 Off 1 On F502 BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATES Each bit contains the operate state for an element See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs The operate bit for element ID X is bit X mod 16 in register X 16 F513 ENUMERATION POWER SWING MODE 0 Two Step 1 Three Step F514 ENUMERATION POWER SWING TRIP MODE 0 Delayed 1 Early F515 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 0 Signed 1 Absolute F516 ENUMERAT...

Page 695: ...be used as FlexAn alogs basically all metering quantities used in protection Value Keypress Value Keypress Value Keypress 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4 2 Message Up 17 Message Down 35 User PB 5 3 7 18 0 36 User PB 6 4 8 19 Decimal 37 User PB 7 5 9 20 38 User PB 8 6 Help 21 Value Up 39 User PB 9 7 Message Left 22 Value Down 40 User PB 10 8 4 23 Reset 41 User PB 11 9 5 24 Use...

Page 696: ...emote RTD 1 3 Remote RTD 2 4 Remote RTD 3 5 Remote RTD 4 6 Remote RTD 5 7 Remote RTD 6 8 Remote RTD 7 9 Remote RTD 8 10 Remote RTD 9 11 Remote RTD 10 12 Remote RTD 11 13 Remote RTD 12 Enumeration Remote DPS input status 0 Intermediate 1 Off 2 On 3 Bad Enumeration Remote double point status input 0 None 1 Remote input 1 2 Remote input 2 3 Remote input 3 64 Remote input 64 Enumeration Configurable G...

Page 697: ... 73 PIOC23 ST Str general 74 PIOC23 ST Op general 75 PIOC24 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 76 PIOC24 ST Op general 77 PIOC25 ST Str general 78 PIOC25 ST Op general 79 PIOC26 ST Str general 80 PIOC26 ST Op general 81 PIOC27 ST Str general 82 PIOC27 ST Op general 83 PIOC28 ST Str general 84 PIOC28 ST Op general 85 PIOC29 ST Str general 86 PIOC29 ST Op general 87 PIOC30 ST ...

Page 698: ...r general 178 PTOC3 ST Op general 179 PTOC4 ST Str general 180 PTOC4 ST Op general 181 PTOC5 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 182 PTOC5 ST Op general 183 PTOC6 ST Str general 184 PTOC6 ST Op general 185 PTOC7 ST Str general 186 PTOC7 ST Op general 187 PTOC8 ST Str general 188 PTOC8 ST Op general 189 PTOC9 ST Str general 190 PTOC9 ST Op general 191 PTOC10 ST Str general 192...

Page 699: ...6 RBRF4 ST OpIn general 287 RBRF5 ST OpEx general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 288 RBRF5 ST OpIn general 289 RBRF6 ST OpEx general 290 RBRF6 ST OpIn general 291 RBRF7 ST OpEx general 292 RBRF7 ST OpIn general 293 RBRF8 ST OpEx general 294 RBRF8 ST OpIn general 295 RBRF9 ST OpEx general 296 RBRF9 ST OpIn general 297 RBRF10 ST OpEx general 298 RBRF10 ST OpIn general 299 RBRF11 ST OpEx ...

Page 700: ... Pos stVal 391 CSWI23 ST Loc stVal 392 CSWI23 ST Pos stVal 393 CSWI24 ST Loc stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 394 CSWI24 ST Pos stVal 395 CSWI25 ST Loc stVal 396 CSWI25 ST Pos stVal 397 CSWI26 ST Loc stVal 398 CSWI26 ST Pos stVal 399 CSWI27 ST Loc stVal 400 CSWI27 ST Pos stVal 401 CSWI28 ST Loc stVal 402 CSWI28 ST Pos stVal 403 CSWI29 ST Loc stVal 404 CSWI29 ST Pos stVal 405 CSWI30...

Page 701: ...2 stVal 499 GGIO1 ST Ind93 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 500 GGIO1 ST Ind94 stVal 501 GGIO1 ST Ind95 stVal 502 GGIO1 ST Ind96 stVal 503 GGIO1 ST Ind97 stVal 504 GGIO1 ST Ind98 stVal 505 GGIO1 ST Ind99 stVal 506 GGIO1 ST Ind100 stVal 507 GGIO1 ST Ind101 stVal 508 GGIO1 ST Ind102 stVal 509 GGIO1 ST Ind103 stVal 510 GGIO1 ST Ind104 stVal 511 GGIO1 ST Ind105 stVal 512 GGIO1 ST Ind10...

Page 702: ...C cVal mag f 603 MMXU2 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 604 MMXU2 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 605 MMXU2 MX VA phsC cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 606 MMXU2 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 607 MMXU2 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 608 MMXU2 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 609 MMXU3 MX TotW mag f 610 MMXU3 MX TotVAr mag f 611 MMXU3 MX TotVA mag f 612 MMXU3 MX TotPF mag f 613 MMXU3 MX Hz mag f 614 MMXU3 MX PPV phsAB cVal ma...

Page 703: ...8 MMXU5 MX W phsA cVal mag f 709 MMXU5 MX W phsB cVal mag f 710 MMXU5 MX W phsC cVal mag f 711 MMXU5 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 712 MMXU5 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 713 MMXU5 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 714 MMXU5 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 715 MMXU5 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 716 MMXU5 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 717 MMXU5 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 718 MMXU5 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 719 MMX...

Page 704: ...os stVal 809 XSWI11 ST Loc stVal 810 XSWI11 ST Pos stVal 811 XSWI12 ST Loc stVal 812 XSWI12 ST Pos stVal 813 XSWI13 ST Loc stVal 814 XSWI13 ST Pos stVal 815 XSWI14 ST Loc stVal 816 XSWI14 ST Pos stVal 817 XSWI15 ST Loc stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 818 XSWI15 ST Pos stVal 819 XSWI16 ST Loc stVal 820 XSWI16 ST Pos stVal 821 XSWI17 ST Loc stVal 822 XSWI17 ST Pos stVal 823 XSWI18 S...

Page 705: ... Ind33 q 66 GGIO1 ST Ind33 stVal 67 GGIO1 ST Ind34 q 68 GGIO1 ST Ind34 stVal 69 GGIO1 ST Ind35 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 70 GGIO1 ST Ind35 stVal 71 GGIO1 ST Ind36 q 72 GGIO1 ST Ind36 stVal 73 GGIO1 ST Ind37 q 74 GGIO1 ST Ind37 stVal 75 GGIO1 ST Ind38 q 76 GGIO1 ST Ind38 stVal 77 GGIO1 ST Ind39 q 78 GGIO1 ST Ind39 stVal 79 GGIO1 ST Ind40 q 80 GGIO1 ST Ind40 stVal 81 GGIO1 ST Ind41 q 82 GGIO...

Page 706: ...q 172 GGIO1 ST Ind86 stVal 173 GGIO1 ST Ind87 q 174 GGIO1 ST Ind87 stVal 175 GGIO1 ST Ind88 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 176 GGIO1 ST Ind88 stVal 177 GGIO1 ST Ind89 q 178 GGIO1 ST Ind89 stVal 179 GGIO1 ST Ind90 q 180 GGIO1 ST Ind90 stVal 181 GGIO1 ST Ind91 q 182 GGIO1 ST Ind91 stVal 183 GGIO1 ST Ind92 q 184 GGIO1 ST Ind92 stVal 185 GGIO1 ST Ind93 q 186 GGIO1 ST Ind93 stVal 187 GGIO1 ST Ind94 ...

Page 707: ...t cVal ang f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 282 MMXU1 MX W phsA cVal mag f 283 MMXU1 MX W phsB cVal mag f 284 MMXU1 MX W phsC cVal mag f 285 MMXU1 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 286 MMXU1 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 287 MMXU1 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 288 MMXU1 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 289 MMXU1 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 290 MMXU1 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 291 MMXU1 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 292 MMXU1 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 293...

Page 708: ...MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 385 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal mag f 386 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal ang f 387 MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 388 MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal ang f 389 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal mag f 390 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal ang f 391 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal mag f 392 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal ang f 393 MMXU4 MX W phsA cVal mag f 394 MMXU4 MX W phsB cVal mag f 395 MMXU4 MX W phsC cVal mag f 396 ...

Page 709: ... AnIn7 mag f 486 GGIO4 MX AnIn8 mag f 487 GGIO4 MX AnIn9 mag f 488 GGIO4 MX AnIn10 mag f 489 GGIO4 MX AnIn11 mag f 490 GGIO4 MX AnIn12 mag f 491 GGIO4 MX AnIn13 mag f 492 GGIO4 MX AnIn14 mag f 493 GGIO4 MX AnIn15 mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 494 GGIO4 MX AnIn16 mag f 495 GGIO4 MX AnIn17 mag f 496 GGIO4 MX AnIn18 mag f 497 GGIO4 MX AnIn19 mag f 498 GGIO4 MX AnIn20 mag f 499 GGIO4 MX AnIn21...

Page 710: ... ST Op general 597 PIOC14 ST Str general 598 PIOC14 ST Op general 599 PIOC15 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 600 PIOC15 ST Op general 601 PIOC16 ST Str general 602 PIOC16 ST Op general 603 PIOC17 ST Str general 604 PIOC17 ST Op general 605 PIOC18 ST Str general 606 PIOC18 ST Op general 607 PIOC19 ST Str general 608 PIOC19 ST Op general 609 PIOC20 ST Str general 610 PIOC20 ST Op gene...

Page 711: ...C66 ST Str general 702 PIOC66 ST Op general 703 PIOC67 ST Str general 704 PIOC67 ST Op general 705 PIOC68 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 706 PIOC68 ST Op general 707 PIOC69 ST Str general 708 PIOC69 ST Op general 709 PIOC70 ST Str general 710 PIOC70 ST Op general 711 PIOC71 ST Str general 712 PIOC71 ST Op general 713 PIOC72 ST Str general 714 PIOC72 ST Op general 715 PTOC1 ST Str g...

Page 712: ... Str general 810 PTUV8 ST Op general 811 PTUV9 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 812 PTUV9 ST Op general 813 PTUV10 ST Str general 814 PTUV10 ST Op general 815 PTUV11 ST Str general 816 PTUV11 ST Op general 817 PTUV12 ST Str general 818 PTUV12 ST Op general 819 PTUV13 ST Str general 820 PTUV13 ST Op general 821 RBRF1 ST OpEx general 822 RBRF1 ST OpIn general 823 RBRF2 ST OpEx general ...

Page 713: ...12 CSWI12 ST Pos stVal 913 CSWI13 ST Loc stVal 914 CSWI13 ST Pos stVal 915 CSWI14 ST Loc stVal 916 CSWI14 ST Pos stVal 917 CSWI15 ST Loc stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 918 CSWI15 ST Pos stVal 919 CSWI16 ST Loc stVal 920 CSWI16 ST Pos stVal 921 CSWI17 ST Loc stVal 922 CSWI17 ST Pos stVal 923 CSWI18 ST Loc stVal 924 CSWI18 ST Pos stVal 925 CSWI19 ST Loc stVal 926 CSWI19 ST Pos stVal 927 CSWI2...

Page 714: ...oc stVal 984 XSWI18 ST Pos stVal 985 XSWI19 ST Loc stVal 986 XSWI19 ST Pos stVal 987 XSWI20 ST Loc stVal 988 XSWI20 ST Pos stVal 989 XSWI21 ST Loc stVal 990 XSWI21 ST Pos stVal 991 XSWI22 ST Loc stVal 992 XSWI22 ST Pos stVal 993 XSWI23 ST Loc stVal 994 XSWI23 ST Pos stVal 995 XSWI24 ST Loc stVal 996 XSWI24 ST Pos stVal 997 XCBR1 ST Loc stVal 998 XCBR1 ST Pos stVal 999 XCBR2 ST Loc stVal 1000 XCBR2...

Page 715: ...ss or both F629 ENUMERATION SCADA PROTOCOL 0 DNP 3 0 1 IEC 60870 5 104 2 IEC 60870 5 103 F630 ENUMERATION IEC 103 ASDU TYPE 0 3 1 9 F631 ENUMERATION VIRTUAL INPUTS FOR IEC 103 Enumeration Item 0 None 1 Network Port 1 2 Network Port 2 3 Network Port 3 Enumeration Item 0 None 1 Failover 2 PRP Enumeration Item 0 Disabled 1 Local and Remote 2 Local 3 Remote Enumeration Item 0 OFF 1 Virtual Input 1 2 V...

Page 716: ...B 120 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin B 4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B B ...

Page 717: ...d that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS at the upper application layer for transfer of real time data This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN env...

Page 718: ...plorer window click the Tools menu and access the SISCO File Transfer Utility 2 Select the Remote AR Name from the drop down list Available files appear in the File Specification area on the right side of the window 3 With the Copy option active select a file to transfer and click the Go button The file is copied and displays in the Local list on the left side of the window 4 Repeat the process to...

Page 719: ...ly be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the T60 virtual inputs Virtual inputs are single point control binary values that can be written by clients They are generally used ...

Page 720: ...tor MMXU1 MX Hz frequency MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsA phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsB phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsC phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX A phsA phase A current magnitude...

Page 721: ...t locator function The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature XCBR1 ST Loc This is the state of the XCBR1 local remote switch A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state When local mode is true IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected XCBR1 ST Opcnt This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850 Command settings are provided...

Page 722: ...me of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item To accomplish this functionality all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes and the timestamp updated when a change is detected regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli ents For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro g...

Page 723: ...nection for greater than two minutes the connection will be aborted by the T60 This frees up the con nection to be used by other clients Therefore when using IEC 61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes 120000 ms This ensures that the T60 will not abort the connection If other MMS data is being polled ...

Page 724: ...n two pre defined data structures named DNA and UserSt Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair GSSE messages are transmit ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs Depending the on the configuration only some of these bit pairs may have val ues that are of interest to re...

Page 725: ...ed for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data It is critical that the configured datasets ...

Page 726: ...UNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1 Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1 The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags a single point sta...

Page 727: ...configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme If the T60 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address that is the least significant bit of the first byte is not set the address used as the destina tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address but with the multicast bit set Thus if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03 then the destination MAC address will be 01 ...

Page 728: ...uration process for IEC 61850 BDA Basic Data Attribute that is not structured DAI Instantiated Data Attribute DO Data Object type or instance depending on the context 842790A2 CDR Ethernet System configurator SCD file System specification tool SSD file System specification data ICD file 2 Process of creating ICD vendor 2 Creating ICD GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup ICD file 1 IED UR series OR ICD f...

Page 729: ...SCL file SCD to set communication configuration parame ters that is required addresses reception GOOSE datasets IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets etc for the IED The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the EnerVista UR Setup software C 5 2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED For example the IED name ...

Page 730: ...rators we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display access through the Settings Product Setup Com munications IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Configuration Transmission Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup Configurable reception GOOSE which includes eight configurable datase...

Page 731: ...ress node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control block The IED node describes the pre configuration of an IED its access points th...

Page 732: ... DataSet name Other DataSet elements FCDA fc doName daName IdInst prefix InClass InInst Other FCDA elements DOI name SDI name Val Text Other DOI elements GSEControl name datSet type confRev appID LN InType InClass prefix inst DataSet name FCDA IdInst prefix InClass InInst doName fc Other FCDA elements ReportControl name datSet intgPd rptID confRev buffered TrgOps dchg OptFields seqNum RptEnabled O...

Page 733: ... SDO The attribute DA has a func tional constraint and can either have a basic type be an enumeration or a structure of a DAType The DAType is built from BDA elements defining the structure elements which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA Figure C 5 ICD FILE STRUCTURE DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE 842798A1 CDR DataTypeTemplates LNodeType id InClass DO name type Other LNodeType elem...

Page 734: ...e procedure is pretty much the same First a substation project must be created either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file SSD Then IEDs are added to the substation Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD the ICD files are imported into the substation project and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importin...

Page 735: ... file and its version and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Substation node describes the substation parameters Figure C 7 SCD FILE STRUCTURE SUBSTATION NODE 842791A1 CDR SCL Header id version revision toolID nameStructure IED Section IED 2 Communication IED Section IED 1 Substation Other IED Sections DataTypeTemplates 842792A1 CDR Substation EquipmentContainer VoltageLevel...

Page 736: ...nectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub network The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control...

Page 737: ...pdate the T60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software 1 Right click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item 2 Select the saved SCD file and click Open 842794A1 CDR IED Section IED 1 AccessPoint name Server Authentication none LDevice inst LN0 InType InClass inst DataSet elements DOI elements Inputs GSEControl elements R...

Page 738: ...n one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file the software prompt the user to save a UR series set tings file for each IED 4 After the URS file is created modify any settings if required 5 To update the relay with the new settings right click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set tings File to Device item 6 The software will prompt for the target device Select the targ...

Page 739: ... SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL GSE B31 Publisher side O Yes B32 Subscriber side Yes TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side O B42 Subscriber side SERVICES SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY IF SERVER SIDE B11 SUPPORTED M1 Logical device c2 Yes M2 Logical node c3 Yes M3 Data c4 Yes M4 Data set c5 Yes M5 Substitution O M6 Setting group control O REP...

Page 740: ...set name M8 5 data reference M8 6 BufTm M8 7 IntgPd M8 8 GI Logging O M9 Log control O M9 1 IntgPd M10 Log O M11 Control M Yes IF GSE B31 32 IS SUPPORTED GOOSE O Yes M12 1 entryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O Yes IF SVC B41 B42 IS SUPPORTED M14 Multicast SVC O M15 Unicast SVC O M16 Time M Yes M17 File transfer O Yes SERVICES AA TP MC SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY SERVER CLAUSE 7 S1 ServerDirectory TP ...

Page 741: ...Yes S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK URCB S27 Report TP c6 Yes S27 1 data change dchg Yes S27 2 qchg change qchg S27 3 data update dupd S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes LOGGING CLAUSE 17 LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 GetLCBValues TP M S31 SetLCBValues TP M LOG S32 QueryLogByTime TP M S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M GENERIC SUBSTATION E...

Page 742: ...SendMSVMessage MC c10 S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O UNICAST SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10 S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O CONTROL CLAUSE 20 S51 Select O Yes S52 SelectWithValue TP O S53 Cancel TP O Yes S54 Operate TP M Yes S55 Command Termination TP O S56 TimeActivated Operate TP O FILE TRANSFER CLAUSE 23 S57 GetFile TP M Yes S58 SetFile TP O S59 DeleteFile TP O S...

Page 743: ...king A LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ANCR Neutral current regulator ARCO Reactive power control ATCC Automatic tap changer controller AVCO Voltage control C LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL CALH Alarm handling CCGR Cooling group control CILO Interlocking CPOW Point on wave switching CSWI Switch controller Yes CSYN Synchronizer controller F LOGICAL NODES FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS FCNT Counter FCSD Curve...

Page 744: ...es MSQI Sequence and imbalance Yes MSTA Metering statistics P LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS PDIF Differential Yes PDIR Direction comparison PDIS Distance Yes PDOP Directional overpower PDUP Directional underpower PFRC Rate of change of frequency PHAR Harmonic restraint PHIZ Ground detector PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent Yes PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS Motor starting time supervisio...

Page 745: ...ferential measurements RPSB Power swing detection blocking Yes RREC Autoreclosing Yes RSYN Synchronism check or synchronizing S LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SCBR Circuit breaker supervision SIMG Insulation medium supervision gas SIML Insulation medium supervision liquid SLTC Tap changer supervision SOPM Supervision of operating mechanism SPDC Mo...

Page 746: ...arth fault neutralizer Petersen coil YLTC Tap changer YPSH Power shunt YPTR Power transformer Z LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ZAXN Auxiliary network ZBAT Battery ZBSH Bushing ZCAB Power cable ZCAP Capacitor bank ZCON Converter ZGEN Generator ZGIL Gas insulated line ZLIN Power overhead line ZMOT Motor ZREA Reactor ZRES Resistor ZRRC Rotating reactive component ZSAR Surge arrestor...

Page 747: ...teroperability table Interoperability means that any required applica tion data in the device which can be coded into an IEC 60870 5 103 data type can be mapped into the IEC 60870 5 103 address space This data is recognized by any IEC 60870 5 103 master D 1 2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND The general formula for the transmitted value is Xt a X b where X is the measurand a is ...

Page 748: ... LAYER Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 least significant octet first as defined in 4 10 of IEC 60870 5 4 is used exclusively in this companion stan dard Common address of ASDU One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU identical with station address More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction INF Semantics ...

Page 749: ... sequence supervision 36 Trip circuit supervision 37 I back up operation 38 VT fuse failure 39 Teleprotection disturbed 46 Group warning 47 Group alarm Earth fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 48 Earth fault L1 49 Earth fault L2 50 Earth fault L3 51 Earth fault forward meaning line 52 Earth fault reverse meaning busbar Fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 64 Start...

Page 750: ...ip IN Auto reclosure indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 128 CB on by AR 129 CB on by long time AR 130 AR blocked Measurands in monitor direction INF Semantics 144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I V 146 Measurands I V P Q 147 Measurands IN VEN 148 Measurands IL123 VL123 P Q f Generic functions in monitor direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attr...

Page 751: ... 2 25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4 Generic functions in control direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attributes of all entries of one group 243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value or attribute of a single entry 245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry 249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write ent...

Page 752: ...D 6 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin D 1 IEC 60870 5 103 APPENDIX D D Voltage L3 E Active power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage L1 L2 MEASURAND MAX MVAL TIMES RATED VALUE 1 2 OR 2 4 ...

Page 753: ...change Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 bits s Balanced Interchange Circuit X 24 X 27 100 bits sec 200 bits sec 300 bits sec 600 bits sec 1200 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 19200 bits sec 38400 bits sec 56000 bits sec 64000 bits sec Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Standard Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommen...

Page 754: ...indicate the following used in standard direction not used cannot be selected in IEC 60870 5 104 standard Process information in monitor direction 1 Single point information M_SP_NA_1 2 Single point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1 3 Double point information M_DP_NA_1 4 Double point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1 5 Step position information M_ST_NA_1 6 Step position information with time t...

Page 755: ...ents of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1 40 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 46 Double command C_DC_NA_1 47 Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1 48 Set point command normalized value C_SE_NA_1 49 Set point command scaled value C_SE_NB_1 50 Set point command short floating point value C_SE_NC...

Page 756: ...all directory select file call file call section F_SC_NA_1 123 Last section last segment F_LS_NA_1 124 Ack file ack section F_AF_NA_1 125 Segment F_SG_NA_1 126 Directory blank or X available only in monitor standard direction C_CD_NA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 1 M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X 2 M_SP_TA_1 3 M_DP_NA_1 4 M_...

Page 757: ...RC_NA_1 48 C_SE_NA_1 49 C_SE_NB_1 50 C_SE_NC_1 51 C_BO_NA_1 58 C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X 59 C_DC_TA_1 60 C_RC_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATION TERMINATION RET...

Page 758: ..._1 112 P_ME_NC_1 X X X 113 P_AC_NA_1 120 F_FR_NA_1 121 F_SR_NA_1 122 F_SC_NA_1 123 F_LS_NA_1 124 F_AF_NA_1 125 F_SG_NA_1 126 F_DR_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ...

Page 759: ...ng point number M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation Clock synchronization Clock synchronization optional see Clause 7 6 Command transmission Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration duration determined by a system parameter in th...

Page 760: ...equences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction Transparent file Background scan Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay Acquisition of transmission delay Definition of time outs Maximum range of values for all time outs 1 to 255 s accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs w PARAMETER...

Page 761: ...ernet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board IAB It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter net The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard Ethernet 802 3 Serial X 21 interface Other selection s from RFC 2200 list below if selected E 1 2 POINT LIST The IEC 60870 5 104 dat...

Page 762: ...E 10 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin E 1 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX E E ...

Page 763: ...ed in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Input Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Control Relay Output Block Object 12 Binary Counters Object 20 Frozen Counters Object 21 Counter Change Event Object 22 Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Deadb...

Page 764: ...Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Off...

Page 765: ... Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted Default Counter Object Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explanation Default Object 20 Default Variation 1 Point by point list attached Count...

Page 766: ...resp 17 28 index 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 10 0 Binary Output Status Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 2 Binary Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 ind...

Page 767: ...t Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 2 16 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 32 Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or ...

Page 768: ... response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 3 32 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 4 16 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 12...

Page 769: ...26 close 30 abort 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 5 File transfer 1 read 2 write 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 6 File transfer status 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 7 File descriptor 28 get file info 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read 00 01 start stop index 7 129 response 00 01...

Page 770: ...formed on a binary counter point the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point BINARY INPUT POINTS Static Steady State Object Number 1 Change Event Object Number 2 Request Function Codes supported 1 read 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Input with status Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 ...

Page 771: ...rtual Input 15 15 Virtual Input 16 16 Virtual Input 17 17 Virtual Input 18 18 Virtual Input 19 19 Virtual Input 20 20 Virtual Input 21 21 Virtual Input 22 22 Virtual Input 23 23 Virtual Input 24 24 Virtual Input 25 25 Virtual Input 26 26 Virtual Input 27 27 Virtual Input 28 28 Virtual Input 29 29 Virtual Input 30 30 Virtual Input 31 31 Virtual Input 32 32 Virtual Input 33 33 Virtual Input 34 34 Vi...

Page 772: ... freeze and clear noack 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Binary Counter with Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event without time Change Event Buffer Size 10 Default Class for all points 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static Steady State Object Number 21 Change Event Object Number 23 Request Function Codes suppor...

Page 773: ...log Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity For example an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul letin 9809 001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be se...

Page 774: ...F 12 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin F 2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX F F ...

Page 775: ...user Tester with an Administrator role Tester User Password testpw GE PDC USER Role Administrator 4 In the clients conf file in the Path_to_Radius etc raddb folder add the following text to define the UR as a RADIUS client where the client IP address is 10 0 0 2 the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the shared secret specified here is also configured on the UR device for successful authentication and t...

Page 776: ...US server Leave the GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910 Update the RADIUS shared secret as specified in the clients conf file Restart the relay for the IP address and port changes to take effect 9 Verify operation Log in to the UR software as follows In the login window select Server as the Authentication Type enter the user name entered for example user name Tester and password testpw Check...

Page 777: ...0090 D1 3 2x 11 February 2003 URT 028 1601 0090 D2 3 2x 02 June 2003 URX 084 1601 0090 E1 3 3x 01 May 2003 URX 080 1601 0090 E2 3 3x 29 May 2003 URX 083 1601 0090 F1 3 4x 10 December 2003 URX 111 1601 0090 F2 3 4x 09 February 2004 URX 115 1601 0090 G1 4 0x 23 March 2004 URX 123 1601 0090 G2 4 0x 17 May 2004 URX 136 1601 0090 H1 4 2x 30 June 2004 URX 145 1601 0090 H2 4 2x 23 July 2004 URX 151 1601 ...

Page 778: ...ISION AA4 PAGE AA3 PAGE AA4 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Update General revision including updated branding from GE Digital Energy to GE Grid Solutions iii Add Added Addendum to account for Distance Element differences between firmware versions 7 21 and 7 24 Also changed Theory of Operation chapter for same specifically Fault Type Characteristic section and Overcurrent Supervision section Delete Deleted EAC...

Page 779: ...ode tables as per exception 30009 2 2 Update Updated specifications 5 221 5 221 Update Updated Neutral Directional Overcurrent settings to include Dual V and Dual I settings to reflect enhanced polarity criteria 6 21 6 21 Add Added ZBASE to Table 6 2 FlexElements Base Units 6 25 Add Added Distance section for Actual Values Metering Distance 8 Delete Deleted chapter 8 on security moving content to ...

Page 780: ... Nameplate 3 8 3 8 Update Updated Figure 3 10 Rear Terminal View Table H 9 MAJOR UPDATES FOR T60 MANUAL REVISION Y1 Sheet 1 of 3 PAGE X2 PAGE Y1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION All All Delete Deleted content pertaining to Ethernet switch Title Title Update Changed part numbers Updated address and contact information 1 1 1 1 Update Updated address and contact information 2 2 Add Added CPU options T U and V to o...

Page 781: ... Internal Items 5 5 111 Add Added Figure Example Of Aggregator Data Sets 5 5 112 Add Added Figure CFG 2 Based Configuration Solution 5 5 113 Add Added examples for a syncrophasor dataset and the creation of different datasets 5 5 111 Add Added example for a CFG 2 based configuration 5 114 5 114 Update Updated PMU 1 basic configuration menu to add 37 118 and 90 5 configuration settings submenus 5 5...

Page 782: ...rver settings general security settings and security alarm settings 10 10 2 Add Added Figure 10 1 Security Settings Menu A A Add Added Flexanalog item PTP IRIG B Delta to Table A 1 FlexAnalog Data Items B 8 B 8 Update Updated Modbus memory map table to include port 0 for Modbus slave address TCP DNP HTTP TFTP MMS and removed references to COM 1 RS485 port C 23 C 23 Update Updated tables in section...

Page 783: ...eld FAIL Failure FD Fault Detector FDH Fault Detector high set FDL Fault Detector low set FLA Full Load Current FO Fiber Optic FREQ Frequency FSK Frequency Shift Keying FTP File Transfer Protocol FxE FlexElement FWD Forward G Generator GE General Electric GND Ground GNTR Generator GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS Global Positioning System HARM Harmonic Harmonics HCT High Current ...

Page 784: ...ture Detector RTU Remote Terminal Unit RX Rx Receive Receiver s second S Sensitive SAT CT Saturation SBO Select Before Operate SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC Secondary SEL Select Selector Selection SENS Sensitive SEQ Sequence SFTP Secure Shell SSH File Transfer Protocol Secure File Transfer Protocol SIR Source Impedance Ratio SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SRC Source SSB Sin...

Page 785: ...GE Multilin T60 Transformer Protection System H 9 APPENDIX H H 2 ABBREVIATIONS H Z Impedance Zone ...

Page 786: ...of 1 October 2013 GE Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers see the GE Grid Solutions Terms and Conditions at https www gegridsolutions com multilin warranty htm For products shipped before 1 October 2013 the standard 24 month warranty applies ...

Page 787: ...OLTAGE CHANNEL 3 12 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING 6 19 AWG WIRE SIZE 3 11 3 34 3 38 3 40 B BANKS 5 6 5 102 5 103 BATTERY disposal 10 5 failure 7 8 replace 10 3 BATTERY FAILURE 7 8 BINARY INPUT POINTS F 8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS F 9 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 3 BLOCK SETTING 5 5 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT actual values 6 30 clearing 5 25 7 2 FlexLogic operands 5 159 logic 5 295 measurement 5 294 settings 5 293 specific...

Page 788: ...RM 5 97 CRC 16 ALGORITHM B 2 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY 2 30 3 10 CSA APPROVAL 2 36 CT BANKS settings 5 102 CT FAILURE FlexLogic operands 5 160 logic 5 305 settings 5 304 CT INPUTS 3 12 5 6 5 102 CT WIRING 3 12 CURRENT BANK 5 102 CURRENT DEMAND 5 76 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL Modbus registers B 20 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5 223 CURRENT HARMONICS 2 28 CURRENT METERING actual values 6 17 specifications 2 28 CURVES de...

Page 789: ...round 2 23 5 192 mho characteristic 5 184 5 186 Modbus registers B 49 phase 2 22 5 182 quad characteristic 5 185 5 186 5 187 5 194 settings 5 181 DISTURBANCE DETECTOR FlexLogic operands 5 163 internal 5 105 DNA 1 BIT PAIR 5 320 DNP COMMUNICATIONS binary counters F 10 binary input points F 8 binary output points F 9 control relay output blocks F 9 device profile document F 1 frozen counters F 10 im...

Page 790: ...EXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR 5 173 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS Modbus registers B 38 settings 5 174 FLEXLOGIC locking equation entries 4 8 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS 5 340 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS 5 341 FORCE TRIGGER 6 29 FORM A RELAY high impedance circuits 3 14 outputs 3 13 3 14 specifications 2 30 FORM C RELAY outputs 3 13 specifications 2 30 FREQUENCY METERING actual values 6 22 Modbus registers B 18 settings 5 104 sp...

Page 791: ...KLIST 1 2 INSTALLATION communications 3 28 CT inputs 3 11 3 12 RS485 3 29 settings 5 100 INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL FlexLogic operands 5 165 logic 5 219 settings 5 219 specifications 2 22 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see PHASE GROUND and NEUTRAL IOC entries INTER RELAY COMMUNICATIONS 2 32 INTRODUCTION 1 3 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE 5 259 IOC see PHASE GROUND and NEUTRAL IOC entries IP ADDRESS 5 31 ent...

Page 792: ... 5 237 specifications 2 24 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL IOC NEUTRAL IOC FlexLogic operands 5 161 logic 5 237 Modbus registers B 40 settings 5 236 specifications 2 23 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 161 logic 5 262 Modbus registers B 50 settings 5 262 specifications 2 24 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL TOC NEUTRAL TOC FlexLogic operands 5 161 logic...

Page 793: ...82 specifications 2 22 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE IOC PHASE IOC FlexLogic operands 5 162 logic 5 230 Modbus registers B 39 specifications 2 23 PHASE MEASUREMENT UNIT see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR PHASE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 162 logic 5 261 Modbus registers B 44 settings 5 261 specifications 2 24 PHASE ROTATION 5 104 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE TOC P...

Page 794: ...c operands 5 163 Modbus registers B 15 B 59 settings 5 245 specifications 2 23 REVISION HISTORY H 1 RF IMMUNITY 2 35 RFI CONDUCTED 2 35 RMS CURRENT 2 28 RMS VOLTAGE 2 28 ROLLING DEMAND 5 77 RRTD INPUTS settings 5 331 RS232 configuration 1 9 specifications 2 32 wiring 3 27 RS422 configuration 3 38 timing 3 39 two channel application 3 38 with fiber interface 3 40 RS485 description 3 29 specificatio...

Page 795: ... 5 143 phasor measurement unit recording 5 152 PMU Modbus registers B 79 test values 5 342 SYSLOG 5 22 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 5 104 SYSTEM LOGS 5 22 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1 5 SYSTEM SETUP 5 102 T TARGET MESSAGES 7 6 TARGET SETTING 5 5 TARGETS MENU 7 6 TCP PORT NUMBER 5 57 TECHNICAL SUPPORT 1 2 TELEPROTECTION actual values 6 5 clearing counters 7 2 FlexLogic operands 5 164 logic 5 326 Modbus registers B 57...

Page 796: ...7 description 4 15 4 16 Modbus registers B 33 settings 5 80 specifications 2 27 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands 5 167 Modbus registers B 37 B 48 settings 5 84 specifications 2 27 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS Modbus registers B 34 settings 5 81 USERST 1 BIT PAIR 5 320 V VAR HOURS 2 28 6 20 VIBRATION TESTING 2 35 VIRTUAL INPUTS actual values 6 4 commands 7 1 FlexLogic operands 5 166...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for T60

Brand: GE Pages: 425

Brand: Warren Controls Pages: 16

Brand: EasyIO Pages: 12

Brand: RMG Pages: 6

EtherNetIP ControlPlex CPC12EN

Brand: E-T-A Pages: 28

Brand: Eaton Pages: 28

Brand: Parallel Pages: 16

Brand: V2 Pages: 46

U1000 iQpump Drive

Brand: YASKAWA Pages: 426

Brand: YASKAWA Pages: 26

Brand: YASKAWA Pages: 210

Z1000 CIMR-ZU*A Series

Brand: YASKAWA Pages: 400

Z1000 CIMR-ZU*A Series

Brand: YASKAWA Pages: 466

Simply Smart PY75 A Series

Brand: BABYTREND Pages: 32

Brand: mikroElektronika Pages: 3

Brand: Window Master Pages: 7

Brand: K&K Pages: 10

MorphoAccess VP MD

Brand: Idemia Pages: 29

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands